Lexmark M5155 Owner S Manual User's Guide

Lexmark-Lexmark-M5170-Owner-S-Manual lexmark-lexmark-m5170-owner-s-manual

Lexmark-Lexmark-M5163-Owner-S-Manual lexmark-lexmark-m5163-owner-s-manual

2014-07-06

: Lexmark Lexmark-Lexmark-M5155-Owner-S-Manual lexmark-lexmark-m5155-owner-s-manual lexmark pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 321 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

M5100 Series
User's Guide
Important: Click here before using this guide.
September 2012 www.lexmark.com
Machine type(s):
4063
Model(s):
29E, 49E, 69E
Contents
Safety information.......................................................................................7
Overview.....................................................................................................9
Using this guide.........................................................................................................................................9
Finding information about the printer......................................................................................................9
Selecting a location for the printer.............................................................11
Additional printer setup.............................................................................13
Installing internal options........................................................................................................................13
Available internal options .................................................................................................................................13
Accessing the controller board .........................................................................................................................14
Installing a memory card ..................................................................................................................................17
Installing an Internal Solutions Port..................................................................................................................18
Installing an optional card ................................................................................................................................23
Installing a printer hard disk .............................................................................................................................24
Removing a printer hard disk............................................................................................................................29
Installing hardware options.....................................................................................................................31
Order of installation..........................................................................................................................................31
Installing optional trays ....................................................................................................................................31
Attaching cables......................................................................................................................................35
Setting up the printer software...............................................................................................................37
Installing the printer software ..........................................................................................................................37
Updating available options in the printer driver ..............................................................................................38
Networking..............................................................................................................................................39
Preparing to set up the printer on an Ethernet network..................................................................................39
Installing the printer on an Ethernet network ..................................................................................................39
Preparing to set up the printer on a wireless network.....................................................................................41
Connecting the printer using the Wireless Setup Wizard.................................................................................42
Connecting the printer to a wireless network using Wi-Fi Protected Setup.....................................................42
Connecting the printer to a wireless network using the Embedded Web Server.............................................43
Changing port settings after installing a new network Internal Solutions Port ................................................44
Setting up serial printing...................................................................................................................................45
Verifying printer setup............................................................................................................................47
Using M5155 and M5163............................................................................48
Learning about the printer......................................................................................................................48
Printer configurations .......................................................................................................................................48
Using the printer control panel.........................................................................................................................50
Contents 2
Understanding the colors of the indicator and Sleep button lights..................................................................50
Understanding the home screen ......................................................................................................................51
Using the touch-screen buttons .......................................................................................................................52
Setting up and using the home screen applications................................................................................54
Finding the IP address of the computer............................................................................................................54
Finding the IP address of the printer ................................................................................................................55
Accessing the Embedded Web Server ..............................................................................................................55
Customizing the home screen ..........................................................................................................................55
Activating the home screen applications..........................................................................................................56
Exporting and importing a configuration..........................................................................................................58
Loading paper and specialty media.........................................................................................................58
Setting the paper size and type ........................................................................................................................58
Configuring Universal paper settings................................................................................................................59
Loading the 250‑ or 550‑sheet tray..................................................................................................................59
Loading the 2100‑sheet tray.............................................................................................................................65
Loading the multipurpose feeder .....................................................................................................................71
Linking and unlinking trays ...............................................................................................................................76
Printing....................................................................................................................................................77
Printing a document .........................................................................................................................................77
Printing from a flash drive ................................................................................................................................79
Printing confidential and other held jobs .........................................................................................................80
Printing information pages ...............................................................................................................................82
Canceling a print job .........................................................................................................................................82
Managing your printer............................................................................................................................83
Finding advanced networking and administrator information.........................................................................83
Checking the virtual display ..............................................................................................................................83
Configuring supply notifications from the Embedded Web Server .................................................................. 83
Modifying confidential print settings................................................................................................................84
Copying printer settings to other printers ........................................................................................................85
Printing a menu settings page ..........................................................................................................................85
Printing a network setup page..........................................................................................................................85
Checking the status of parts and supplies ........................................................................................................86
Saving energy....................................................................................................................................................86
Restoring factory default settings.....................................................................................................................90
Securing the printer ..........................................................................................................................................90
Using M5170..............................................................................................95
Learning about the printer......................................................................................................................95
Printer configurations .......................................................................................................................................95
Using the printer control panel.........................................................................................................................97
Understanding the colors of the Sleep button and indicator lights..................................................................97
Understanding the home screen ......................................................................................................................98
Using the touch-screen buttons .......................................................................................................................99
Contents 3
Setting up and using the home screen applications..............................................................................102
Finding the IP address of the computer..........................................................................................................102
Finding the IP address of the printer ..............................................................................................................102
Accessing the Embedded Web Server ............................................................................................................103
Customizing the home screen ........................................................................................................................103
Activating the home screen applications........................................................................................................103
Exporting and importing a configuration........................................................................................................106
Loading paper and specialty media.......................................................................................................106
Setting the paper size and type ......................................................................................................................106
Configuring Universal paper settings..............................................................................................................107
Loading the 250‑ or 550‑sheet tray................................................................................................................107
Loading the 2100‑sheet tray...........................................................................................................................113
Loading the multipurpose feeder ...................................................................................................................119
Linking and unlinking trays .............................................................................................................................124
Printing..................................................................................................................................................125
Printing a document .......................................................................................................................................125
Printing from a flash drive ..............................................................................................................................127
Printing confidential and other held jobs .......................................................................................................129
Printing information pages .............................................................................................................................130
Canceling a print job .......................................................................................................................................131
Managing your printer..........................................................................................................................131
Finding advanced networking and administrator information.......................................................................131
Checking the virtual display ............................................................................................................................131
Configuring supply notifications from the Embedded Web Server ................................................................132
Modifying confidential print settings..............................................................................................................133
Copying printer settings to other printers ......................................................................................................133
Printing a menu settings page ........................................................................................................................133
Printing a network setup page........................................................................................................................134
Checking the status of parts and supplies ......................................................................................................134
Saving energy..................................................................................................................................................134
Restoring factory default settings...................................................................................................................138
Securing the memory before moving the printer...........................................................................................138
Paper and specialty media guide..............................................................143
Using specialty media............................................................................................................................143
Paper guidelines....................................................................................................................................144
Supported paper sizes, types, and weights...........................................................................................148
Understanding the printer menus............................................................153
Menus list..............................................................................................................................................153
Paper menu...........................................................................................................................................154
Reports menu........................................................................................................................................165
Contents 4
Network/Ports menu.............................................................................................................................166
Security menu.......................................................................................................................................179
Settings menu........................................................................................................................................183
Help menu.............................................................................................................................................206
Saving money and the environment.........................................................207
Saving paper and toner.........................................................................................................................207
Recycling................................................................................................................................................208
Maintaining the printer............................................................................210
Ordering supplies..................................................................................................................................210
Storing supplies.....................................................................................................................................212
Replacing supplies.................................................................................................................................212
Cleaning the printer parts.....................................................................................................................218
Moving the printer................................................................................................................................219
Clearing jams............................................................................................222
Avoiding jams........................................................................................................................................222
Understanding jam messages and locations.........................................................................................224
[x]‑page jam, lift front cover to remove cartridge. [200–201]..............................................................226
[x]‑page jam, open upper rear door. [202]...........................................................................................229
[x]‑page jam, open upper and lower rear door. [231–234]..................................................................230
[x]‑page jam, remove standard bin jam. [203]......................................................................................232
[x]‑page jam, remove tray 1 to clear duplex. [235–239].......................................................................232
[x]‑page jam, open tray [x]. [24x]..........................................................................................................234
[x]‑page jam, clear manual feeder [250]...............................................................................................235
[x]‑page jam, remove paper, open stapler door. Leave paper in bin. [455–457]..................................236
[x]‑page jam, remove paper, open finisher rear door. Leave paper in bin. [451].................................239
[x]‑page jam, remove paper, open expander rear door. Leave paper in bin. [41y.xx]..........................240
[x]‑page jam, remove paper, open mailbox rear door. Leave paper in bin. [43y.xx]............................241
Troubleshooting.......................................................................................243
Understanding the printer messages....................................................................................................243
Solving printer problems.......................................................................................................................259
Solving home screen applications problems.........................................................................................293
Embedded Web Server does not open.................................................................................................293
Contacting customer support................................................................................................................294
Contents 5
Notices.....................................................................................................295
Product information..............................................................................................................................295
Edition notice........................................................................................................................................295
Power consumption..............................................................................................................................299
Index........................................................................................................313
Contents 6
Safety information
Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily accessible.
Do not place or use this product near water or wet locations.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: This product uses a laser. Use of controls or adjustments or performance of
procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
This product uses a printing process that heats the print media, and the heat may cause the media to release emissions.
You must understand the section in your operating instructions that discusses the guidelines for selecting print media
to avoid the possibility of harmful emissions.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The lithium battery in this product is not intended to be replaced. There is a
danger of explosion if a lithium battery is incorrectly replaced. Do not recharge, disassemble, or incinerate a
lithium battery. Discard used lithium batteries according to the manufacturer's instructions and local
regulations.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each tray separately. Keep all
other trays closed until needed.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more
trained personnel to lift it safely.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Before moving the printer, follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or
printer damage:
•Turn off the printer, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
•Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer.
•If two or more optional finishers are installed, then remove the finishers individually from the printer.
Notes:
–Make sure to remove the topmost finisher first.
–To remove the finisher, hold the finisher on both sides, and then lift the latches to unlock the finisher.
•If the printer does not have a caster base but is configured with optional trays, then remove the trays.
Note: Slide the latch on the right side of the optional tray toward the front of the tray until it clicks into place.
•Use the handholds located on both sides of the printer to lift it.
•Make sure your fingers are not under the printer when you set it down.
•Make sure there is adequate clearance around the printer.
•Use only the power cord provided with this product or the manufacturer's authorized replacement.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or
memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn
them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer,
unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer before proceeding.
Use only the power cord provided with this product or the manufacturer's authorized replacement.
Safety information 7
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Make sure that all external connections (such as Ethernet and telephone system
connections) are properly installed in their marked plug-in ports.
This product is designed, tested, and approved to meet strict global safety standards with the use of specific
manufacturer's components. The safety features of some parts may not always be obvious. The manufacturer is not
responsible for the use of other replacement parts.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Do not cut, twist, bind, crush, or place heavy objects on the power cord. Do not
subject the power cord to abrasion or stress. Do not pinch the power cord between objects such as furniture
and walls. If any of these things happen, a risk of fire or electrical shock results. Inspect the power cord regularly
for signs of such problems. Remove the power cord from the electrical outlet before inspecting it.
Refer service or repairs, other than those described in the user documentation, to a service representative.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Do not set up this product or make any electrical or cabling connections, such as a
power cord, a fax feature or USB cable, during a lightning storm.
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must
use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options. If you purchased a printer with
a similar configuration, then you may need additional furniture. For more information, see
www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.
Safety information 8
Overview
Using this guide
This User’s Guide provides general and specific information on using the printer models that are listed on the cover
page.
The following chapters contain information applicable to all printer models:
•Selecting a location for the printer
•Additional printer setup
•Paper and specialty media guide
•Understanding printer menus
•Saving money and the environment
•Maintaining the printer
•Clearing jams
•Troubleshooting
To find instructions for your printer:
•Use the table of contents.
•Use the Search function or the Find toolbar of your application to search for page content.
Finding information about the printer
What are you looking for? Find it here
Initial setup instructions:
•Connecting the printer
•Installing the printer software
Setup documentation—The setup documentation came
with the printer and is also available at
http://support.lexmark.com.
Additional setup and instructions for using the printer:
•Selecting and storing paper and specialty media
•Loading paper
•Configuring printer settings
•Viewing and printing documents and photos
•Setting up and using the printer software
•Configuring the printer on a network
•Caring for and maintaining the printer
•Troubleshooting and solving problems
User's Guide and Quick Reference Guide—The guides are
available on the Documentation CD.
For more information, visit
http://support.lexmark.com.
Instructions for:
•Connecting the printer to an Ethernet network
•Troubleshooting printer connection problems
Networking Guide—Open the Software CD, and then look
for Printer and Software Documentation under the Pubs
folder. From the list of publications, click the Networking
Guide link.
Overview 9
What are you looking for? Find it here
Help using the printer software Windows or Mac Help—Open a printer software program
or application, and then click Help.
Click
?
to view context‑sensitive information.
Notes:
•Help is automatically installed with the printer
software.
•The printer software is located in the printer
program folder or on the desktop, depending on
your operating system.
The latest supplemental information, updates, and customer
support:
•Documentation
•Driver downloads
•Live chat support
•E‑mail support
•Voice support
Lexmark Support Web site—
http://support.lexmark.com
Note: Select your country or region, and then select
your product to view the appropriate support site.
Support telephone numbers and hours of operation for
your country or region can be found on the Support Web
site or on the printed warranty that came with your
printer.
Record the following information (located on the store
receipt and at the back of the printer), and have it ready
when you contact customer support so that they may
serve you faster:
•Machine Type number
•Serial number
•Date purchased
•Store where purchased
Warranty information Warranty information varies by country or region:
•In the U.S.—See the Statement of Limited Warranty
included with this printer, or at
http://support.lexmark.com.
•In other countries and regions—See the printed
warranty that came with your printer.
Overview 10
Selecting a location for the printer
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more
trained personnel to lift it safely.
When selecting a location for the printer, leave enough room to open trays, covers, and doors. If you plan to install any
hardware options, then leave enough room for them also. It is important to:
•Set up the printer near a properly grounded and easily accessible electrical outlet.
•Make sure airflow in the room meets the latest revision of the ASHRAE 62 standard or the CEN Technical Committee
156 standard.
•Provide a flat, sturdy, and stable surface.
•Keep the printer:
–Clean, dry, and free of dust.
–Away from stray staples and paper clips.
–Away from the direct airflow of air conditioners, heaters, or ventilators.
–Free from direct sunlight and humidity extremes.
•Observe the recommended temperatures and avoid fluctuations:
Ambient temperature 15.6 to 32.2°C (60 to 90°F)
Storage temperature 1 to 35°C (34 to 95°F)
1
2
3
4
5
1Right side 305 mm (12 in.)
2Front 508 mm (20 in.)
3Left side 305 mm (12 in.)
4Rear 305 mm (12 in.)
5Top 115 mm (4.5 in.)
Selecting a location for the printer 11
1
2
3
4
5
1Right side 305 mm (12 in.)
2Front 508 mm (20 in.)
3Left side 305 mm (12 in.)
4Rear 305 mm (12 in.)
5Top 115 mm (4.5 in.)
Selecting a location for the printer 12
Additional printer setup
Installing internal options
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or
memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn
them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Available internal options
•Memory card
–DDR3 DIMM
–Flash memory
•Fonts
•Firmware cards
–Forms barcode
–PRESCRIBE
–IPDS
–Printcryption
•Printer hard disk
•LexmarkTM Internal Solutions Ports (ISP)
–Parallel 1284-B interface
–MarkNetTM N8350 802.11 b/g/n wireless printer server
–MarkNet N8130 10/100 fiber interface
–RS-232-C serial interface
Additional printer setup 13
Accessing the controller board
Note: This task requires a flat‑head screwdriver.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or
memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn
them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
1Remove the controller board access cover.
1
2
2Using a screwdriver, loosen the screws on the controller board shield.
Additional printer setup 14
3Remove the shield.
1
2
4Use the following illustration to locate the appropriate connector:
Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity.
Touch a metal surface on the printer first before touching any controller board electronic component or
connector.
1
3
2
1Lexmark Internal Solutions Port or printer hard disk connector
2Option card connector
3Memory card connector
Additional printer setup 15
5Align the screws with the holes on the shield, and then reattach the shield.
2
1
6Tighten the screws on the shield.
Additional printer setup 16
7Reattach the access cover.
2
1
Installing a memory card
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or
memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn
them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity.
Touch something metal on the printer first before touching any controller board electronic components or
connectors.
An optional memory card can be purchased separately and attached to the controller board.
1Access the controller board.
For more information, see “Accessing the controller board” on page 14.
2Unpack the memory card.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the connection points along the edge of the card. Doing so may
cause damage.
3Align the notch (1) on the memory card with the ridge (2) on the connector.
1
2
Additional printer setup 17
4Push the memory card straight into the connector, and then push the card toward the controller board wall until
it clicks into place.
5Reattach the controller board shield, and then the controller board access cover.
Installing an Internal Solutions Port
The controller board supports one optional Lexmark Internal Solutions Port (ISP).
Note: This task requires a flat‑head screwdriver.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or
memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn
them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity.
Touch something metal on the printer first before touching any controller board electronic components or
connectors.
1Access the controller board.
For more information, see “Accessing the controller board” on page 14.
2If an optional printer hard disk is installed, then remove the printer hard disk first.
For more information, see “Removing a printer hard disk” on page 29.
Additional printer setup 18
3Unpack the ISP kit.
2
3
4
1
1ISP solution
2Screw for attaching the plastic bracket to the ISP
3Screws for attaching the ISP mounting bracket to the controller board shield
4Plastic bracket
4Remove the metal cover from the ISP opening.
aLoosen the screw.
bLift the metal cover, and then pull it out completely.
Additional printer setup 19
1 2 3
5Align the posts of the plastic bracket with the holes on the controller board cage, and then press the plastic bracket
on the controller board cage until it clicks into place.
Note: Make sure that the plastic bracket has latched completely, and that the plastic bracket is seated firmly on
the controller board cage.
6Install the ISP on the plastic bracket.
Note: Hold the ISP at an angle over the plastic bracket so that any overhanging connectors will pass through the
ISP opening in the controller board cage.
Additional printer setup 20
7Lower the ISP toward the plastic bracket until the ISP is seated between the guides of the plastic bracket.
8Use the provided thumbscrew for the ISP to attach the plastic bracket to the ISP.
Note: Turn the screw clockwise, enough to hold the ISP in place, but do not tighten it yet.
Additional printer setup 21
9Attach the two provided screws to secure the ISP mounting bracket to the controller board shield.
10 Tighten the thumbscrew that is attached to the ISP.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not screw it on too tightly.
11 Connect the ISP solution interface cable into the receptacle of the controller board.
Note: The plugs and receptacles are color-coded.
Additional printer setup 22
Installing an optional card
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or
memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have other devices attached to the printer, then turn them
off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity.
Touch a metal surface on the printer before touching any controller board electronic components or connectors.
1Access the controller board.
For more information, see “Accessing the controller board” on page 14.
2Unpack the optional card.
Warning—Potential Damage: Avoid touching the connection points along the edge of the card.
3Holding the card by its sides, align the plastic pins (1) on the card with the holes (2) on the controller board.
1
2
Additional printer setup 23
4Push the card firmly into place as shown in the illustration.
Warning—Potential Damage: Improper installation of the card may cause damage to the card and the
controller board.
Note: The entire length of the connector on the card must touch and be flushed against the controller board.
5Close the controller board access door.
Note: When the printer software and any hardware options are installed, it may be necessary to manually add
the options in the printer driver to make them available for print jobs. For more information, see “Updating
available options in the printer driver” on page 38.
Installing a printer hard disk
Note: This task requires a flat‑head screwdriver.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or
memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn
them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity.
Touch something metal on the printer first before touching any controller board electronic components or
connectors.
1Access the controller board.
For more information, see “Accessing the controller board” on page 14.
2Unpack the printer hard disk.
Additional printer setup 24
3Locate the appropriate connector on the controller board cage.
Note: If an optional ISP is currently installed, then the printer hard disk must be installed onto the ISP.
Additional printer setup 25
To install a printer hard disk onto the ISP:
aRemove the screws attached to the printer hard disk mounting bracket, and then remove the bracket.
bAlign the standoffs of the printer hard disk to the holes in the ISP, and then press the printer hard disk down
until the standoffs are in place.
Installation warning: Hold only the edges of the printed circuit board assembly. Do not touch or press on
the center of the printer hard disk. Doing so may cause damage.
cInsert the plug of the printer hard disk interface cable into the receptacle of the ISP.
Note: The plugs and receptacles are color‑coded.
Additional printer setup 26
To install a printer hard disk directly on the controller board cage:
aAlign the standoffs of the printer hard disk to the holes in the controller board cage, and then press the printer
hard disk down until the standoffs are in place.
Installation warning: Hold only the edges of the printed circuit board assembly. Do not touch or press on
the center of the printer hard disk. Doing so may cause damage.
Additional printer setup 27
bUse the two provided screws to attach the printer hard disk mounting bracket.
cInsert the plug of the printer hard disk interface cable into the receptacle of the controller board.
Note: The plugs and receptacles are color‑coded.
Additional printer setup 28
Removing a printer hard disk
Note: This task requires a flat‑head screwdriver.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or
memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn
them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity.
Touch a metal surface on the printer before touching any controller board electronic components or connectors.
1Access the controller board.
For more information, see “Accessing the controller board” on page 14.
2Unplug the printer hard disk interface cable from the controller board, leaving the cable attached to the printer
hard disk. To unplug the cable, squeeze the paddle at the plug of the interface cable to disengage the latch before
pulling out the cable.
Additional printer setup 29
3Remove the screws holding the printer hard disk in place.
4Remove the printer hard disk.
5Set aside the printer hard disk.
Additional printer setup 30
Installing hardware options
Order of installation
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more
trained personnel to lift it safely.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or
memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn
them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must
use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options. If you purchased a printer with
a similar configuration, then you may need additional furniture. For more information, see
www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
Install the printer and any hardware options you have purchased in the following order:
•Caster base
•2100‑sheet tray or spacer
•Optional 550‑ or 250‑sheet tray
•Printer
For more information on installing a caster base, optional 550‑ or 250‑sheet tray, spacer, or 2100‑sheet tray, see the
setup sheet that came with the option.
Installing optional trays
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more
trained personnel to lift it safely.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or
memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn
them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must
use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options. If you purchased a printer with
a similar configuration, then you may need additional furniture. For more information, see
www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
1Turn off the printer using the power switch, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
Additional printer setup 31
2Unpack the optional tray, and then remove all packing material.
3Pull out the tray completely from the base.
4Remove any packing material from inside the tray.
5Insert the tray into the base.
6Place the tray near the printer.
7Align the optional tray with the caster base.
Note: Make sure to lock the wheels of the caster base to secure the printer.
Additional printer setup 32
8Align the printer with the tray, and then slowly lower the printer into place.
Note: Optional trays lock together when stacked.
Additional printer setup 33
9Connect the power cord to the printer, then to a properly grounded electrical outlet, and then turn on the printer.
Additional printer setup 34
Note: When the printer software and any optional trays are installed, you may need to manually add the
options in the printer driver to make them available for print jobs. For more information, see “Updating
available options in the printer driver” on page 38.
To uninstall the optional trays, slide the latch on the right side of the printer toward the front of the printer until
it clicks into place, and then remove stacked trays one at a time from the top to the bottom.
Attaching cables
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Do not set up this product or make any electrical or cabling connections, such
as a power cord, a fax feature, or USB cable, during a lightning storm.
Connect the printer to the computer using a USB cable or Ethernet cable.
Make sure to match the following:
•The USB symbol on the cable with the USB symbol on the printer
•The appropriate Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port
•The appropriate parallel cable with the parallel port
Additional printer setup 35
1
2
3
4
6
5
Use the To
1Parallel port Connect the printer to a computer.
Note: This can also be used in installing an optional Internal Solutions Port (ISP).
2USB port Attach an optional wireless network adapter.
3Ethernet port Connect the printer to a network.
4USB printer port Connect the printer to a computer.
5Security slot Attach a lock that will secure the controller board.
6Printer power cord socket Connect the printer to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the USB cable, any wireless network adapter, or the printer in the area
shown while actively printing. Loss of data or a malfunction can occur.
Organizing the cables
Note: This feature is available only if you purchase optional trays and a caster base.
After attaching the Ethernet cable and power cord, neatly tuck the cables in the channels at the back of the printer.
Additional printer setup 36
Setting up the printer software
Installing the printer software
Notes:
•If you installed the printer software on the computer before but need to reinstall the software, then uninstall
the current software first.
•Close all open software programs before installing the printer software.
•For Macintosh users, you may download all the drivers and utilities from our Web site.
1Obtain a copy of the software installer package.
•From the Software CD that came with your printer
•From our Web site:
Go to http://support.lexmark.com, and then navigate to:
SUPPORT & DOWNLOAD > select your printer > select your operating system
2Double‑click the software installer package.
Wait for the installation dialog to appear.
If you are using the Software CD and the installation dialog does not appear, then do the following:
Additional printer setup 37
In Windows 8
From the Search charm, type run, and then navigate to:
Apps list > Run > type D:\setup.exe > OK.
In Windows 7 or earlier
aClick or click Start, and then click Run.
bIn the Start Search or Run dialog, type D:\setup.exe.
cPress Enter, or click OK.
Note: D is the letter of your CD or DVD drive.
3Click Install, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen.
Updating available options in the printer driver
When any hardware options are installed, you may need to manually add the options in the printer driver to make
them available for use.
For Windows users
1Open the printers folder.
In Windows 8
From the Search charm, type run, and then navigate to:
Apps list > Run > type control printers > OK
In Windows 7 or earlier
aClick or click Start, and then click Run.
bIn the Start Search or Run dialog, type control printers.
cPress Enter, or click OK.
2Depending on your device, do either of the following:
•Press and hold the printer you want to update.
•Right‑click the printer you want to update.
3From the menu that appears, do either of the following:
•For Windows 7 or later, select Printer properties.
•For earlier versions, select Properties.
4Click the Configuration tab.
5Do either of the following:
•Click Update Now ‑ Ask Printer.
•Under Configuration Options, manually add any installed hardware options.
6Click Apply.
Additional printer setup 38
For Macintosh users
1From the Apple menu, navigate to either of the following:
•System Preferences > Print & Scan > select your printer > Options & Supplies > Driver
•System Preferences > Print & Fax > select your printer > Options & Supplies > Driver
2Add any installed hardware options, and then click OK.
Networking
Notes:
•Purchase a MarkNet N8350 wireless network adapter first before setting up the printer on a wireless network.
For information on installing the wireless network adapter, see the instruction sheet that came with the
adapter.
•A Service Set Identifier (SSID) is a name assigned to a wireless network. Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP), Wi-Fi
Protected Access (WPA), WPA2, and 802.1X-RADIUS are types of security used on a network.
Preparing to set up the printer on an Ethernet network
To configure your printer to connect to an Ethernet network, organize the following information before you begin:
Note: If your network automatically assigns IP addresses to computers and printers, continue on to installing the
printer.
•A valid, unique IP address for the printer to use on the network
•The network gateway
•The network mask
•A nickname for the printer (optional)
Note: A printer nickname can make it easier for you to identify your printer on the network. You can choose to
use the default printer nickname, or assign a name that is easier for you to remember.
You will need an Ethernet cable to connect the printer to the network and an available port where the printer can
physically connect to the network. Use a new network cable when possible to avoid potential problems caused by a
damaged cable.
Installing the printer on an Ethernet network
For Windows users
1Obtain a copy of the software installer package.
•From the Software CD that came with your printer
•From our Web site:
Go to http://support.lexmark.com, and then navigate to:
SUPPORT & DOWNLOAD > select your printer > select your operating system
2Double‑click the software installer package.
Wait for the installation dialog to appear.
If you are using the Software CD and the installation dialog does not appear, then do the following:
Additional printer setup 39
In Windows 8
From the Search charm, type run, and then navigate to:
Apps list > Run > type D:\setup.exe > OK
In Windows 7 or earlier
aClick or click Start, and then click Run.
bIn the Start Search or Run dialog, type D:\setup.exe.
cPress Enter, or click OK.
Note: D is the letter of your CD or DVD drive.
3Click Install, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen.
4Select Ethernet connection, and then click Continue.
5Attach the Ethernet cable when instructed to do so.
6Select the printer from the list, and then click Continue.
Note: If the configured printer does not appear in the list, then click Modify Search.
7Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
For Macintosh users
1Allow the network DHCP server to assign an IP address to the printer.
2Obtain the printer IP address either:
•From the printer control panel
•From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu
•By printing a network setup page or menu settings page, and then finding the TCP/IP section
Note: You will need the IP address if you are configuring access for computers on a different subnet than the printer.
3Install the printer driver on the computer.
aDownload the driver at http://support.lexmark.com.
bDouble‑click the installer package for the printer, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen.
cSelect a destination, and then click Continue.
dFrom the Easy Install screen, click Install.
eType the user password, and then click OK.
All the necessary applications are installed on the computer.
fClick Close when installation is complete.
4Add the printer.
•For IP printing:
aFrom the Apple menu, navigate to either of the following:
–System Preferences > Print & Scan
–System Preferences > Print & Fax
bClick +.
cClick the IP tab.
dType the printer IP address in the address field, and then click Add.
Additional printer setup 40
•For AppleTalk printing:
Notes:
–Make sure AppleTalk is activated on your printer.
–This feature is supported only in Mac OS X version 10.5.
aFrom the Apple menu, navigate to:
System Preferences > Print & Fax
bClick +, and then navigate to:
AppleTalk > select your printer > Add
Preparing to set up the printer on a wireless network
Notes:
•Make sure your wireless network adapter is installed in your printer and working properly. For more
information, see the instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter.
•Make sure your access point (wireless router) is turned on and is working properly.
Make sure you have the following information before setting up the printer on a wireless network:
•SSID—The SSID is also referred to as the network name.
•Wireless Mode (or Network Mode)—The mode is either infrastructure or ad hoc.
•Channel (for ad hoc networks)—The channel defaults to automatic for infrastructure networks.
Some ad hoc networks will also require the automatic setting. Check with your system support person if you are
not sure which channel to select.
•Security Method—There are four basic options for Security Method:
–WEP key
If your network uses more than one WEP key, then enter up to four in the provided spaces. Select the key
currently in use on the network by selecting the default WEP transmit key.
–WPA or WPA2 preshared key or passphrase
WPA includes encryption as an additional layer of security. The choices are AES or TKIP. Encryption must be set
for the same type on the router and on the printer, or the printer will not be able to communicate on the
network.
–802.1X–RADIUS
If you are installing the printer on an 802.1X network, then you may need the following:
•Authentication type
•Inner authentication type
•802.1X user name and password
•Certificates
–No security
If your wireless network does not use any type of security, then you will not have any security information.
Note: We do not recommend using an unsecured wireless network.
Notes:
–If you do not know the SSID of the network that your computer is connected to, then launch the wireless utility
of the computer network adapter, and then look for the network name. If you cannot find the SSID or the
Additional printer setup 41
security information for your network, then see the documentation that came with the access point, or contact
your system support person.
–To find the WPA/WPA2 preshared key or passphrase for the wireless network, see the documentation that
came with the access point, see the Embedded Web Server associated with the access point, or consult your
system support person.
Connecting the printer using the Wireless Setup Wizard
Before you begin, make sure that:
•A wireless network adapter is working and installed in the printer. For more information, see the instruction sheet
that came with the adapter.
•An Ethernet cable is disconnected from the printer.
•Active NIC is set to Auto. To set this to Auto, navigate to either of the following:
– > Network/Ports > Active NIC > Auto
– > Network/Ports > Active NIC > Auto > Submit
Note: Make sure to turn off the printer, then wait for at least five seconds, and then turn on the printer.
1From the printer control panel, navigate to either of the following:
• > Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Wireless > Wireless Connection Setup
• > Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Wireless > Wireless Connection Setup
2Select a wireless connection setup.
Select To
Search for networks Show available wireless connections.
Note: This menu shows all broadcast secured or unsecured SSIDs.
Enter a network name Manually type the SSID.
Note: Make sure to type the correct SSID.
Wi‑Fi Protected Setup Connect the printer to a wireless network using Wi‑Fi Protected Setup.
3Follow the instructions on the printer display.
Connecting the printer to a wireless network using Wi-Fi Protected Setup
Before you begin, make sure that:
•The access point (wireless router) is Wi‑Fi Protected Setup (WPS) certified or WPS‑compatible. For more
information, see the documentation that came with your access point.
•A wireless network adapter installed in your printer is attached and working properly. For more information, see
the instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter.
Additional printer setup 42
Using the Push Button Configuration method
1Depending on your printer model, navigate to either of the following:
• > Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Wireless > Wi‑Fi Protected Setup > Start Push
Button Method
• > Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Wireless > Wi‑Fi Protected Setup > Start Push
Button Method
2Follow the instructions on the printer display.
Using the Personal Identification Number (PIN) method
1Depending on your printer model, navigate to either of the following:
• > Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Wireless > Wi‑Fi Protected Setup > Start PIN Method
• > Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Wireless > Wi‑Fi Protected Setup > Start PIN Method
2Copy the eight–digit WPS PIN.
3Open a Web browser, and then type the IP address of your access point in the address field.
Notes:
•The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
4Access the WPS settings. For more information, see the documentation that came with your access point.
5Enter the eight‑digit PIN, and then save the setting.
Connecting the printer to a wireless network using the Embedded Web Server
Before you begin, make sure that:
•Your printer is connected temporarily to an Ethernet network.
•A wireless network adapter is installed in your printer and working properly. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer control panel. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Network/Ports > Wireless.
3Modify the settings to match the settings of your access point (wireless router).
Note: Make sure to enter the correct SSID, security method, preshared key or passphrase, network mode, and
channel.
4Click Submit.
Additional printer setup 43
5Turn off the printer, and then disconnect the Ethernet cable. Then wait for at least five seconds, and then turn the
printer back on.
6To verify if your printer is connected to the network, print a network setup page. Then in the Network Card [x]
section, see if the status is Connected.
Changing port settings after installing a new network Internal Solutions Port
When a new Lexmark Internal Solutions Port (ISP) is installed in the printer, the printer configurations on computers
that access the printer must be updated since the printer will be assigned a new IP address. All computers that access
the printer must be updated with this new IP address.
Notes:
•If the printer has a static IP address, then you do not need to make any changes to the computer configurations.
•If the computers are configured to use the network name, instead of an IP address, then you do not need to
make any changes to your computer configurations.
•If you are adding a wireless ISP to a printer previously configured for an Ethernet connection, then make sure
the printer is disconnected from the Ethernet network when you configure the printer to operate wirelessly. If
the printer is connected to the Ethernet network, then the wireless configuration completes, but the wireless
ISP is inactive. To activate the wireless ISP, disconnect the printer from the Ethernet network, turn off the
printer, and then turn it back on.
•Only one network connection is active at a time. To switch between Ethernet and wireless connection types,
turn off the printer, connect the cable (to switch to an Ethernet connection) or disconnect the cable (to switch
to a wireless connection), and then turn the printer back on.
For Windows users
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer control panel. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Open the printers folder.
In Windows 8
From the Search charm, type Run and then navigate to:
Apps list > Run > type control printers > OK
In Windows 7 or earlier
aClick , or click Start and then click Run.
bIn the Start Search or Run dialog, type control printers.
cPress Enter, or click OK.
Additional printer setup 44
3To select the printer that has changed, do either of the following:
•Press and hold the printer, and then select Printer properties.
•Right‑click the printer, and then select Printer properties (Windows 7 or later) or Properties (earlier versions).
Note: If there is more than one copy of the printer, then update all of them with the new IP address.
4Click the Ports tab.
5Select the port from the list, and then click Configure Port.
6Type the new IP address in the “Printer Name or IP Address” field.
7Click OK > Close.
For Macintosh users
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer control panel. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Add the printer.
•For IP printing:
aFrom the Apple menu, navigate to either of the following:
–System Preferences > Print & Scan
–System Preferences > Print & Fax
bClick +.
cClick the IP tab.
dType the printer IP address in the address field, and then click Add.
•For AppleTalk printing:
Notes:
–Make sure AppleTalk is activated on your printer.
–This feature is supported only in Mac OS X version 10.5.
aFrom the Apple menu, navigate to:
System Preferences > Print & Fax
bClick +, and then navigate to:
AppleTalk > select the printer > Add
Setting up serial printing
Use serial printing to print when the computer is far from the printer or to print at a reduced speed.
After installing the serial or communication (COM) port, configure the printer and the computer. Make sure you have
connected the serial cable to the COM port on your printer.
1Set the parameters in the printer.
aFrom the printer control panel, navigate to the menu for the port settings.
bLocate the menu for the serial port settings, and then adjust the settings, if necessary.
Additional printer setup 45
cSave the modified settings, and then print a menu settings page.
2Install the printer driver.
aObtain a copy of the software installer package.
•From the Software CD that came with your printer
•From our Web site:
Go to http://support.lexmark.com, and then navigate to:
SUPPORT & DOWNLOAD > select your printer > select your operating system
bDouble‑click the software installer package.
Wait for the installation dialog to appear.
If you are using the Software CD and the installation dialog does not appear, then do the following:
In Windows 8
From the Search charm type run, and then navigate to:
Apps list > Run > type D:\setup.exe > OK
In Windows 7 or earlier
1Click or click Start, and then click Run.
2In the Start Search or Run dialog, type D:\setup.exe.
3Press Enter or click OK.
Note: D is the letter of your CD or DVD drive.
cClick Install.
dFollow the instructions on the computer screen.
eSelect Advanced, and then click Continue.
fFrom the Configure Printer Connection dialog, select a port.
gIf the port is not in the list, then click Refresh or navigate to:
Add port > select a port type > enter the necessary information > OK
hClick Continue > Finish.
3Set the COM port parameters.
After installing the printer driver, set the serial parameters in the COM port assigned to the printer driver.
Note: Make sure the serial parameters in the COM port match the serial parameters you set in the printer.
aOpen Device Manager.
In Windows 8
From the Search charm type run, and then navigate to:
Apps list > Run > type devmgmt.msc > OK
In Windows 7 or earlier
1Click or click Start, and then click Run.
2In the Start Search or Run dialog, type devmgmt.msc.
3Press Enter or click OK.
bDouble‑click Ports (COM & LPT) to expand the list of available ports.
Additional printer setup 46
cDo either of the following:
•Press and hold the COM port where you attached the serial cable to your computer (example: COM1).
•Right‑click the COM port where you attached the serial cable to your computer (example: COM1).
dClick Properties.
eOn the Port Settings tab, set the serial parameters to the same serial parameters set in the printer.
Check the serial heading of the menu settings page for the printer settings.
fClick OK, and then close all the dialogs.
gPrint a test page to verify printer installation.
Verifying printer setup
When all hardware and software options are installed and the printer is turned on, verify that the printer is set up
correctly by printing the following:
•Menu settings page—Use this page to verify that all printer options are installed correctly. A list of installed options
appears toward the bottom of the page. If an option you installed is not listed, then it is not installed correctly.
Remove the option, and then install it again.
For more information, see “Printing a menu settings page” on page 85 or “Printing a menu settings page” on
page 133
•Network setup page—Use this page to verify the network connection. This page also provides important
information that aids network printing configuration.
Note: Make sure your printer has Ethernet or wireless capability and is attached to a network.
For more information, see “Printing a network setup page” on page 85 or “Printing a network setup page” on
page 134.
Additional printer setup 47
Using M5155 and M5163
Learning about the printer
Printer configurations
Basic model
12
43
1Standard bin
2Printer control panel
3Multipurpose feeder
4Standard 550‑sheet tray (Tray 1)
Fully configured model
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must
use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options. If you purchased a printer with
a similar configuration, then you may need additional furniture. For more information, see
www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
Using M5155 and M5163 48
The following illustration shows the maximum number of optional finishers and trays that are supported by the printer.
For more information on other configurations, visit www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
6
1
2
7
8
5
4
3
Hardware option Alternative hardware option
1Staple finisher •Output expander
•4‑bin mailbox
24‑bin mailbox •Output expander
•High‑capacity output expander
•Staple finisher
3Caster base None
42100‑sheet tray None
5550‑sheet tray 250‑sheet tray
6250‑sheet tray 550‑sheet tray
74‑bin mailbox Output expander
8Output expander 4‑bin mailbox
•In a configuration with three optional finishers, the output expander and mailbox may be installed in any order.
•In a configuration with two optional finishers:
–The staple finisher must always be on top.
–The high‑capacity output expander must always be at the bottom.
–The output expander is the only finisher that can be placed on top of the high‑capacity output expander.
Using M5155 and M5163 49
•When using optional trays:
–Always use a caster base when the printer is configured with a 2100‑sheet tray.
–The 2100‑sheet tray must always be at the bottom of a configuration.
–A maximum of four optional trays may be configured with the printer.
–The optional 250‑ and 550‑sheet trays may be installed in any order.
Using the printer control panel
1234
5
6
7
Use the To
1Display •View the printer status.
•Set up and operate the printer.
2Home button Go to the home screen.
3Sleep button Enable Sleep mode or Hibernate mode.
Do the following to wake the printer from Sleep Mode:
•Press any hard button.
•Pull out Tray 1 or load paper in the multipurpose feeder.
•Open a door or cover.
•Send a print job from the computer.
•Perform a power‑on reset with the main power switch.
•Attach a device to the USB port on the printer.
4Keypad Enter numbers, letters, or symbols.
5Stop or Cancel button Stop all printer activity.
6Indicator light Check the status of the printer.
7USB port Connect a flash drive to the printer.
Note: Only the front USB port supports flash drives.
Understanding the colors of the indicator and Sleep button lights
The colors of the indicator and Sleep button lights on the printer control panel signify a certain printer status or condition.
Using M5155 and M5163 50
Indicator light color and its corresponding printer status
Indicator light Printer status
Off The printer is off or in Hibernate mode.
Blinking green The printer is warming up, processing data, or printing.
Solid green The printer is on, but idle.
Blinking red The printer requires user intervention.
Sleep button light color and its corresponding printer status
Sleep button light Printer status
Off The printer is off, idle or in Ready state.
Solid amber The printer is in Sleep mode.
Blinking amber The printer is entering or waking from Hibernate mode.
Blinking amber for 0.1 second, then goes
completely off for 1.9 seconds in a slow,
pulsing pattern
The printer is in Hibernate mode.
Understanding the home screen
When the printer is turned on, the display shows a basic screen, referred to as the home screen. Use the home screen
buttons and icons to initiate an action.
Note: Your home screen may vary depending on your home screen customization settings, administrative setup, and
active embedded solutions.
1234
5
6
7
8
Touch To
1Change Language Change the primary language of the printer.
2Bookmarks Create, organize, and save a set of bookmarks (URLs) into a tree view of folders and file links.
Note: The tree view does not include bookmarks created within Forms and Favorites, and
the ones in the tree are not usable in Forms and Favorites.
3Held Jobs Display all current held jobs.
Using M5155 and M5163 51
Touch To
4USB View, select, or print photos and documents from a flash drive.
Note: This icon appears only when you return to the home screen while a memory card or
flash drive is connected to the printer.
5Menus Access printer menus.
Note: These menus are available only when the printer is in ready state.
6Status message bar •Show the current printer status such as Ready or Busy.
•Show printer conditions such as Imaging unit low or Cartridge Low.
•Show intervention messages and the instructions on how to clear them.
7Status/Supplies •Show a printer warning or error message whenever the printer requires intervention to
continue processing.
•View more information on the printer warning or message, and on how to clear it.
8Tips View a context‑sensitive help information.
This may also appear on the home screen:
Touch To
Search Held Jobs Search current held jobs.
Jobs by user Access print jobs saved by user.
Profiles and Solutions Access profiles and solutions.
Features
Feature Description
Attendance message alert If an attendance message affects a function, then this icon appears and the red
indicator light blinks.
Warning If an error condition occurs, then this icon appears.
Printer IP address
Example: 123.123.123.123
The IP address of your printer is located at the top left corner of the home screen
and appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods. You can use the IP address
when accessing the Embedded Web Server to view and remotely configure printer
settings even when you are not physically near the printer.
Using the touch-screen buttons
Note: Your home screen may vary, depending on your home screen customization settings, administrative setup,
and active embedded solutions.
Using M5155 and M5163 52
12
3
4
5
Touch the To
1Radio button Select or clear an item.
2Up arrow Scroll up.
3Down arrow Scroll down.
4Accept button Save a setting.
5Cancel button •Cancel an action or a selection.
•Return to the previous screen.
Other touch-screen buttons
Touch To
Return to the home screen.
Open a context-sensitive Help dialog on the printer control panel.
Scroll to the left.
Scroll to the right.
Using M5155 and M5163 53
Setting up and using the home screen applications
Notes:
•Your home screen may vary depending on your home screen customization settings, administrative setup, and
active embedded applications. Some applications are supported only in select printer models.
•There may be additional solutions and applications available for purchase. For more information, visit
www.lexmark.com or inquire at your point of purchase.
Finding the IP address of the computer
Note: Make sure that you know how your printer and computer are connected to the network (Ethernet or
wireless).
The computer IP address is required when setting up home screen applications, such as:
•Forms and Favorites
•Multi Send
•Scan to Network
For Windows users
1Open the command window.
In Windows 8
From the Search charm, type run, and then navigate to:
Apps list > Run > type cmd > OK
In Windows 7 or earlier
aClick or click Start, and then click Run.
bIn the Start Search or Run dialog, type cmd.
cPress Enter, or click OK.
2Type ipconfig, and then click Go or press Enter.
Note: Type ipconfig /all to see additional useful information.
3Look for IP Address.
The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
For Macintosh users
Note: This is applicable only in Mac OS X version 10.5 or later.
1From the Apple menu, navigate to:
System Preferences > Network
2Click Ethernet, Wi‑Fi, or AirPort.
3Click Advanced > TCP/IP.
4Look for IPv4 Address.
Using M5155 and M5163 54
Finding the IP address of the printer
Note: Make sure your printer is connected to a network or to a print server.
You can find the printer IP address:
•From the top left corner of the printer home screen.
•From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu.
•By printing a network setup page or menu settings page, and then finding the TCP/IP section.
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
Accessing the Embedded Web Server
The Embedded Web Server is the printer Web page that lets you view and remotely configure printer settings even
when you are not physically near the printer.
1Obtain the printer IP address:
•From the printer control panel home screen
•From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu
•By printing a network setup page or menu settings page, and then finding the TCP/IP section
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
3Press Enter.
Note: If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
Customizing the home screen
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2Do one or more of the following:
•Show or hide the icons of basic printer functions.
aClick Settings > General Settings > Home screen customization.
bSelect the check boxes to specify which icons appear on the home screen.
Note: If you clear a check box beside an icon, then the icon does not appear on the home screen.
cClick Submit.
•Customize the icon for an application. For more information, see “Finding information about the home screen
applications” on page 56 or see the documentation that came with the application.
Using M5155 and M5163 55
Activating the home screen applications
Finding information about the home screen applications
Your printer comes with preinstalled home screen applications. Before you can use these applications, you must first
activate and set up these applications using the Embedded Web Server. For more information on accessing the
Embedded Web Server, see “Accessing the Embedded Web Server” on page 55.
For more information on configuring and using the home screen applications, do the following:
1Go to http://support.lexmark.com, and then do either of the following:
•Click Business Solutions, and then select the name of the application.
•Click Software and Solutions, and then select either of the following:
–Scan to Network—Find information about the Scan to Network application.
–Other Applications—Find information about the other applications.
2Click the Manuals tab, and then select the document for the home screen application.
Using Background and Idle Screen
Icon Description
The application lets you customize the background and idle screen of your printer home screen.
1From the home screen, navigate to:
Change Background > select background to use
2Touch .
Setting up Forms and Favorites
Note: A later version of this User's Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator’s Guide of this application. To
check for updates of this User’s Guide, go to http://support.lexmark.com.
Use To
Streamline work processes by letting you quickly find and print frequently used online forms directly
from the printer home screen.
Note: The printer must have permission to access the network folder, FTP site, or Web site where the
bookmark is stored. From the computer where the bookmark is stored, use sharing, security, and
firewall settings to allow the printer at least a read access. For help, see the documentation that
came with your operating system.
Using M5155 and M5163 56
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management > Forms and Favorites.
3Click Add, and then customize the settings.
Notes:
•See the mouse-over help beside each field for a description of the setting.
•To make sure the location settings of the bookmark are correct, type the correct IP address of the host
computer where the bookmark is located. For more information on obtaining the IP address of the host
computer, see “Finding the IP address of the computer” on page 54.
•Make sure the printer has access rights to the folder where the bookmark is located.
4Click Apply.
To use the application, touch Forms and Favorites on the printer home screen, and then navigate through form
categories, or search for forms based on a form number, name, or description.
Understanding Eco‑Settings
Icon Description
The application lets you easily manage energy consumption, noise, toner, and paper usage settings to
help reduce the environmental impact of your printer.
Setting up Remote Operator Panel
This application shows the printer control panel on your computer screen and lets you interact with the printer control
panel, even when you are not physically near the network printer. From your computer screen, you can view the printer
status, release held print jobs, create bookmarks, and do other print-related tasks you might normally do while standing
at the network printer.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2Click Settings > Remote Operator Panel Settings.
3Select the Enabled check box, and then customize the settings.
4Click Submit.
To use the application, click Remote Operator Panel > Launch VNC Applet.
Using M5155 and M5163 57
Exporting and importing a configuration
You can export configuration settings into a text file, and then import the file to apply the settings to other printers.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2To export or import a configuration for one application, do the following:
aClick Settings > Apps > Apps Management.
bFrom the list of installed applications, click the name of the application you want to configure.
cClick Configure, and then do either of the following:
•To export a configuration to a file, click Export, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen to
save the configuration file.
Notes:
–When saving the configuration file, you can type a unique file name or use the default name.
–If a "JVM Out of Memory” error occurs, then repeat the export process until the configuration file is
saved.
•To import a configuration from a file, click Import, and then browse to the saved configuration file that was
exported from a previously configured printer.
Notes:
–Before importing the configuration file, you can choose to preview it first or load it directly.
–If a timeout occurs and a blank screen appears, then refresh the Web browser, and then click Apply.
3To export or import a configuration for multiple applications, do the following:
aClick Settings > Import/Export.
bDo either of the following:
•To export a configuration file, click Export Embedded Solutions Settings File, and then follow the instructions
on the computer screen to save the configuration file.
•To import a configuration file, do the following:
1Click Import Embedded Solutions Settings File > Choose File, and then browse to the saved configuration
file that was exported from a previously configured printer.
2Click Submit.
Loading paper and specialty media
The selection and handling of paper and specialty media can affect how reliably documents print. For more information,
see “Avoiding jams” on page 222 and “Storing paper” on page 147.
Setting the paper size and type
From the home screen navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Paper Size/Type > select a tray > select the paper size or type >
Using M5155 and M5163 58
Configuring Universal paper settings
The Universal paper size is a user‑defined setting that lets you print on paper sizes that are not preset in the printer
menus.
Notes:
•The smallest supported Universal size is 70 x 127 mm (2.76 x 5 inches) for one‑sided printing and
105 x 148 mm (4.13 x 5.83 inches) for two‑sided (duplex) printing.
•The largest supported Universal size is 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches) for one‑sided and two‑sided printing.
•When printing on paper less than 210 mm (8.3 inches) wide, the printer prints at a reduced speed to prevent
damage to the fuser.
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Universal Setup > Units of Measure > select a unit of measure
2Touch Portrait Width or Portrait Height.
3Select the width or height, and then touch .
Loading the 250‑ or 550‑sheet tray
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each tray separately. Keep all
other trays closed until needed.
1Pull out the tray.
Notes:
•When loading Folio‑, legal‑, or Oficio‑size paper, lift the tray slightly and pull it out.
•Do not remove trays while a job prints or while Busy appears on the display. Doing so may cause a jam.
Using M5155 and M5163 59
2Squeeze and slide the width guide to the correct position for the size of the paper being loaded until it clicks into
place.
2
1
Note: Use the paper size indicators on the bottom of the tray to help position the guides.
Using M5155 and M5163 60
3Unlock the length guide, and then squeeze and slide the guide to the correct position for the size of the paper being
loaded.
3
12
Notes:
•Lock the length guide for all paper sizes.
•Use the paper size indicators on the bottom of the tray to help position the guides.
Using M5155 and M5163 61
4Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the
edges on a level surface.
5Load the paper stack with the printable side facedown.
Note: Make sure the paper or envelope is loaded properly.
•There are different ways of loading letterhead depending on whether an optional staple finisher is installed or
not.
Without an optional staple finisher With an optional staple finisher
ABC
One‑sided printing One‑sided printing
ABC
Two‑sided printing
ABC
Two‑sided printing
•If you are loading prepunched paper for use with the staple finisher, then make sure the holes on the long edge
of the paper are on the right side of the tray.
One‑sided printing Two‑sided printing
ABC
Note: If the holes on the long edge of the paper are on the left side of the tray, then a jam may occur.
Using M5155 and M5163 62
•Do not slide the paper into the tray. Load paper as shown in the illustration.
•If you are loading envelopes, then make sure that the flap side is facing up and the envelopes are on the left
side of the tray.
Using M5155 and M5163 63
•Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper fill indicator.
Warning—Potential Damage: Overfilling the tray can cause paper jams.
6For custom‑ or Universal‑size paper, adjust the paper guides to lightly touch the sides of the stack, and then lock
the length guide.
7Insert the tray.
8From the printer control panel, set the paper size and type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the
tray.
Note: Set the correct paper size and type to avoid paper jams and print quality problems.
Using M5155 and M5163 64
Loading the 2100‑sheet tray
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each tray separately. Keep all
other trays closed until needed.
1Pull out the tray.
2Adjust the width and length guides.
Loading A5‑size paper
aPull up and slide the width guide to the position for A5.
LGL
OFC
FOLIO
LTR
A4
A5
1
LGL
OFC
FOLIO
LTR
A4
A5
2
LGL
OFC
FOLIO
LTR
A4
A5
Using M5155 and M5163 65
bSqueeze and slide the length guide to the position for A5 until it clicks into place.
12
cRemove the A5 length guide from its holder.
12
dInsert the A5 length guide into its designated slot.
Note: Press the A5 length guide until it clicks into place.
Using M5155 and M5163 66
Loading A4‑, letter‑, legal‑, Oficio‑, and Folio‑size paper
aPull up and slide the width guide to the correct position for the size of the paper being loaded.
LGL
OFC
FOLIO
LTR
A4
A5
1
LGL
OFC
FOLIO
LTR
A4
A5
2
LGL
OFC
FOLIO
LTR
A4
A5
bIf the A5 length guide is still attached to the length guide, then remove it from its place. If the A5 length guide
is not attached, then proceed to step d.
Using M5155 and M5163 67
cPut the A5 length guide in its holder.
2
1
dSqueeze the length guide and slide it to the correct position for the size of the paper being loaded until it clicks
into place.
LGL
OFC
FOLIO
LTR
A4
A5
Using M5155 and M5163 68
3Flex sheets of paper back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten
the edges on a level surface.
4Load the paper stack with the printable side facedown.
Note: Make sure the paper is loaded properly.
•There are different ways of loading letterhead depending on whether an optional staple finisher is installed or
not.
Without an optional staple finisher With an optional staple finisher
ABC
One‑sided printing
ABC
One‑sided printing
ABC
Two‑sided printing
ABC
Two‑sided printing
•If you are loading prepunched paper for use with the staple finisher, then make sure the holes on the long edge
of the paper are on the right side of the tray.
Using M5155 and M5163 69
One‑sided printing Two‑sided printing
ABC
ABC
Note: If the holes on the long edge of the paper are on the left side of the tray, then a jam may occur.
•Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper fill indicator.
Warning—Potential Damage: Overfilling the tray can cause paper jams.
5Insert the tray.
Note: Press the paper stack down while inserting the tray.
Using M5155 and M5163 70
LGL
OFC
FOLIO
LTR
A4
A5
6From the printer control panel, set the paper size and type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the
tray.
Note: Set the correct paper size and type to avoid paper jams and print quality problems.
Loading the multipurpose feeder
1Pull down the multipurpose feeder door.
Note: Do not load or close the multipurpose feeder while a job is printing.
B5
EXEC
A4 A5
LTR
Using M5155 and M5163 71
2Pull the multipurpose feeder extender.
B5
EXEC
A4 A5
LTR
Note: Guide the extender gently so that the multipurpose feeder is fully extended and open.
3Slide the width guide to the correct position for the size of the paper being loaded.
B5
EXEC
A4 A5
LTR
Note: Use the paper size indicators on the bottom of tray to help position the guides.
Using M5155 and M5163 72
B5
EXEC
A4 A5
LTR
4Prepare the paper or specialty media for loading.
•Flex sheets of paper back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten
the edges on a level surface.
•Hold transparencies by the edges, and then fan them. Straighten the edges on a level surface.
Note: Avoid touching the printable side of the transparencies. Be careful not to scratch them.
•Flex the stack of envelopes back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Straighten the edges on a level
surface.
5Load the paper or specialty media.
Note: Slide the stack gently into the multipurpose feeder until it comes to a stop.
•Load only one size and type of paper or specialty media at a time.
•Make sure the paper fits loosely in the multipurpose feeder, lies flat, and is not bent or wrinkled.
Using M5155 and M5163 73
•There are different ways of loading letterhead depending on whether an optional staple finisher is installed or
not.
Without an optional staple finisher With an optional staple finisher
ABC
One‑sided printing
ABC
One‑sided printing
ABC
Two‑sided printing
ABC
Two‑sided printing
•If you are loading prepunched paper for use with the staple finisher, then make sure the holes on the long edge
of the paper are on the right side of the tray.
One‑sided printing Two‑sided printing
ABC
Note: If the holes on the long edge of the paper are on the left side of the tray, then a jam may occur.
Using M5155 and M5163 74
•Load envelopes with the flap side down and on the left of the multipurpose feeder.
B5
EXEC
A4 A5
LTR
Warning—Potential Damage: Never use envelopes with stamps, clasps, snaps, windows, coated linings, or
self‑stick adhesives. These envelopes may severely damage the printer.
•Make sure the paper or specialty media is below the maximum paper fill indicator.
Warning—Potential Damage: Overfilling the feeder can cause paper jams.
6For custom- or Universal-size paper, adjust the width guides to lightly touch the sides of the stack.
7From the Paper menu on the printer control panel, set the paper size and type in the Paper menu to match the
paper loaded in the tray.
Note: Set the correct paper size and type to avoid paper jams and print quality problems.
Using M5155 and M5163 75
Linking and unlinking trays
Linking and unlinking trays
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Paper Menu.
3Change the paper size and type settings for the trays you are linking.
•To link trays, make sure the paper size and type for the tray match that of the other tray.
•To unlink trays, make sure the paper size or type for the tray does not match that of the other tray.
4Click Submit.
Note: You can also change the paper size and type settings using the printer control panel. For more information,
see “Setting the paper size and type” on page 58.
Warning—Potential Damage: Paper loaded in the tray should match the paper type name assigned in the printer.
The temperature of the fuser varies according to the specified paper type. Printing issues may occur if settings are
not properly configured.
Creating a custom name for a paper type
Using the Embedded Web Server
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Paper Menu > Custom Names.
3Select a custom name, and then type a custom paper type name.
4Click Submit.
5Click Custom Types, and then verify if the new custom paper type name has replaced the custom name.
Using the printer control panel
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Custom Names
2Select a custom name, and then type a custom paper type name.
Using M5155 and M5163 76
3Touch .
4Touch Custom Types, and then verify that the new custom paper type name has replaced the custom name.
Assigning a custom paper type
Using the Embedded Web Server
Assign a custom paper type name to a tray when linking or unlinking trays.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Paper Menu > Custom Types.
3Select a custom paper type name, and then select a paper type
Note: Paper is the factory default paper type for all user‑defined custom names.
4Click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Custom Types
2Select a custom paper type name, and then select a paper type
Note: Paper is the factory default paper type for all user‑defined custom names.
3Touch .
Printing
Printing a document
Printing forms
Use the Forms and Favorites application to quickly and easily access frequently used forms or other information that
is regularly printed. Before you can use this application, first set it up on the printer. For more information, see “Setting
up Forms and Favorites” on page 56.
1From the printer home screen, navigate to:
Forms and Favorites > select the form from the list > enter the number of copies > adjust other settings
2Depending on your printer model, touch , , or Submit.
Using M5155 and M5163 77
Printing a document
1From the Paper menu on the printer control panel, set the paper type and size to match the paper loaded.
2Send the print job:
For Windows users
aWith a document open, click File > Print.
bClick Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
cAdjust the settings, if necessary.
dClick OK > Print.
For Macintosh users
aCustomize the settings in the Page Setup dialog:
1With a document open, choose File > Page Setup.
2Choose a paper size or create a custom size to match the paper loaded.
3Click OK.
bCustomize the settings in the Print dialog:
1With a document open, choose File > Print.
If necessary, click the disclosure triangle to see more options.
2From the Print dialog and pop‑up menus, adjust the settings if necessary.
Note: To print on a specific paper type, adjust the paper type setting to match the paper loaded, or
select the appropriate tray or feeder.
3Click Print.
Printing from a mobile device
For the list of supported mobile devices and to download a compatible mobile printing application, visit
http://lexmark.com/mobile.
Note: Mobile printing applications may also be available from your mobile device manufacturer.
Adjusting toner darkness
Using the Embedded Web Server
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Print Settings > Quality Menu > Toner Darkness.
3Adjust the setting, and then click Submit.
Using M5155 and M5163 78
Using the printer control panel
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > Print Settings > Quality Menu > Toner Darkness
2Adjust the setting, and then touch .
Printing from a flash drive
Supported flash drives and file types
Notes:
•High‑speed USB flash drives must support the full‑speed standard. Low-speed USB devices are not supported.
•USB flash drives must support the File Allocation Table (FAT) system. Devices formatted with New Technology
File System (NTFS) or any other file system are not supported.
Recommended flash drives File type
•Lexar JumpDrive FireFly (512MB and 1GB)
•SanDisk Cruzer Micro (512MB and 1GB)
•Sony Micro Vault Classic (512MB and 1GB)
Documents:
•.pdf
•.xps
Images:
•.dcx
•.gif
•.jpeg or .jpg
•.bmp
•.pcx
•.tiff or .tif
•.png
•.fls
Printing from a flash drive
Notes:
•Before printing an encrypted PDF file, you will be prompted to type the file password from the printer control
panel.
•You cannot print files for which you do not have printing permissions.
1Insert a flash drive into the USB port.
Notes:
•A flash drive icon appears on the printer home screen when a flash drive is inserted.
•If you insert the flash drive when the printer requires attention, such as when a jam has occurred, then the
printer ignores the flash drive.
Using M5155 and M5163 79
•If you insert the flash drive while the printer is processing other print jobs, then Busy appears. After these
print jobs are processed, you may need to view the held jobs list to print documents from the flash drive.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the printer or the flash drive in the area shown while actively
printing, reading, or writing from the memory device. Loss of data can occur.
2From the printer control panel, touch the document you want to print.
3Touch the arrows to specify the number of copies for printing, and then touch Print.
Notes:
•Do not remove the flash drive from the USB port until the document has finished printing.
•If you leave the flash drive in the printer after leaving the initial USB menu screen, then touch Held Jobs on
the home screen to print files from the flash drive.
Printing confidential and other held jobs
Storing print jobs in the printer
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Security > Confidential Print > select a print job type
Using M5155 and M5163 80
Use To
Max Invalid PIN Limit the number of times an invalid PIN can be entered.
Note: When the limit is reached, the print jobs for that user name and PIN
are deleted.
Confidential Job Expiration Hold print jobs in the computer until you enter the PIN from the printer control
panel.
Note: The PIN is set from the computer. It must be four digits, using the
numbers 0–9.
Repeat Job Expiration Print and store print jobs in the printer memory.
Verify Job Expiration Print one copy of a print job and hold the remaining copies. It lets you examine
if the first copy is satisfactory or not. The print job is automatically deleted
from the printer memory when all copies are printed.
Reserve Job Expiration Store print jobs for printing at a later time.
Note: The print jobs are held until deleted from the Held Jobs menu.
Notes:
•Confidential, Verify, Reserve, and Repeat print jobs may be deleted if the printer requires extra memory to
process additional held jobs.
•You can set the printer to store print jobs in the printer memory until you start the print job from the printer
control panel.
•All print jobs that can be initiated by the user at the printer are called held jobs.
2Touch .
Printing confidential and other held jobs
Note: Confidential and Verify print jobs are automatically deleted from memory after printing. Repeat and Reserve
jobs are held in the printer until you delete them.
For Windows users
1With a document open, click File > Print.
2Click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
3Click Print and Hold.
4Select the print job type (Confidential, Repeat, Reserve, or Verify), and then assign a user name. For a confidential
print job, also enter a four‑digit PIN.
5Click OK or Print.
6From the printer home screen, release the print job.
•For confidential print jobs, navigate to:
Held jobs > select your user name > Confidential Jobs > enter the PIN > Print
•For other print jobs, navigate to:
Held jobs > select your user name > select the print job > specify the number of copies > Print
Using M5155 and M5163 81
For Macintosh users
1With a document open, choose File > Print.
If necessary, click the disclosure triangle to see more options.
2From the print options or Copies & Pages pop‑up menu, choose Job Routing.
3Select the print job type (Confidential, Repeat, Reserve, or Verify), and then assign a user name. For a confidential
print job, also enter a four‑digit PIN.
4Click OK or Print.
5From the printer home screen, release the print job.
•For confidential print jobs, navigate to:
Held jobs > select your user name > Confidential Jobs > enter the PIN > Print
•For other print jobs, navigate to:
Held jobs > select your user name > select the print job > specify the number of copies > Print
Printing information pages
Printing a font sample list
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Reports > Print Fonts
2Touch PCL Fonts or PostScript Fonts.
Printing a directory list
A directory list shows the resources stored in a flash memory or in the printer hard disk.
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Reports > Print Directory
Canceling a print job
Canceling a print job from the printer control panel
1From the printer control panel, touch Cancel Jobs or press on the keypad.
2Touch the print job you want to cancel, and then touch Delete Selected Jobs.
Canceling a print job from the computer
For Windows users
1Open the printers folder.
Using M5155 and M5163 82
In Windows 8
From the Search charm, type run, and then navigate to:
Apps list > Run > type control printers > OK
In Windows 7 or earlier
aClick or click Start, and then click Run.
bIn the Start Search or Run dialog, type control printers.
cPress Enter, or click OK.
2Double‑click the printer icon.
3Select the print job you want to cancel.
4Click Delete.
For Macintosh users
1From the Apple menu, navigate to either of the following:
•System Preferences > Print & Scan > select your printer > Open Print Queue
•System Preferences > Print & Fax > select your printer > Open Print Queue
2From the printer window, select the print job you want to cancel, and then delete it.
Managing your printer
Finding advanced networking and administrator information
This chapter covers basic administrative support tasks using the Embedded Web Server. For more advanced system
support tasks, see the Networking Guide on the Software CD or the Embedded Web Server Administrator's Guide at
http://support.lexmark.com.
Checking the virtual display
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Check the virtual display that appears at the top left corner of the screen.
The virtual display works as an actual display would work on a printer control panel.
Configuring supply notifications from the Embedded Web Server
You can determine how you would like to be notified when supplies run nearly low, low, very low, or reach their
end‑of‑life by setting the selectable alerts.
Using M5155 and M5163 83
Notes:
•Selectable alerts can be set on the toner cartridge, imaging unit, and maintenance kit.
•All selectable alerts can be set for nearly low, low, and very low supply conditions. Not all selectable alerts can
be set for the end‑of‑life supply condition. E‑mail selectable alert is available for all supply conditions.
•The percentage of estimated remaining supply that prompts the alert can be set on some supplies for some
supply conditions.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Print Settings > Supply Notifications.
3From the drop‑down menu for each supply, select one of the following notification options:
Notification Description
Off The normal printer behavior for all supplies occurs.
E‑mail Only The printer generates an e‑mail when the supply condition is reached. The status of the
supply appears on the menus page and status page.
Warning The printer displays the warning message and generates an e‑mail about the status of the
supply. The printer does not stop when the supply condition is reached.
Continuable Stop1The printer stops processing jobs when the supply condition is reached, and the user needs
to press a button to continue printing.
Non Continuable Stop1,2 The printer stops processing jobs when the supply condition is reached. The supply must be
replaced to continue printing.
1 The printer generates an e-mail about the status of the supply when supply notification is enabled.
2 The printer stops when some supplies become empty to prevent damage.
4Click Submit.
Modifying confidential print settings
Note: This feature is available only in network printers or printers connected to print servers.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Configuration > Other Settings tab > Security > Confidential Print Setup.
Using M5155 and M5163 84
3Modify the settings:
•Set a maximum number of PIN entry attempts. When a user exceeds that number, all of the jobs for that user
are deleted.
•Set an expiration time for confidential print jobs. When a user has not printed the jobs within that time, all of
the jobs for that user are deleted.
4Save the modified settings.
Copying printer settings to other printers
Note: This feature is available only in network printers.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Copy Printer Settings.
3To change the language, select a language from the drop‑down menu, and then click Click here to submit language.
4Click Printer Settings.
5Type the IP addresses of the source and target printers.
Note: If you want to add or remove target printers, then click Add Target IP or Remove Target IP.
6Click Copy Printer Settings.
Printing a menu settings page
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Reports > Menu Settings Page
Printing a network setup page
If the printer is attached to a network, then print a network setup page to verify the network connection. This page
also provides important information that aids network printing configuration.
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Reports > Network Setup Page
2Check the first section of the network setup page and confirm that the status is Connected.
If the status is Not Connected, then the LAN drop may not be active, or the network cable may be malfunctioning.
Consult your system support person for a solution, and then print another network setup page.
Using M5155 and M5163 85
Checking the status of parts and supplies
A message appears on the printer display when a replacement supply item is needed or when maintenance is required.
Checking the status of parts and supplies on the printer control panel
From the home screen, touch Status/Supplies > View Supplies.
Checking the status of parts and supplies from the Embedded Web Server
Note: Make sure the computer and the printer are connected to the same network.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated
by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Device Status > More Details.
Saving energy
Using Eco‑Mode
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > General Settings > Eco‑Mode.
3Select a setting.
Using M5155 and M5163 86
Use To
Off Use the factory default settings for all settings associated with Eco‑Mode.
Notes:
•Settings that were changed when other modes were selected are reset to the factory default
settings.
•Off supports the performance specifications of the printer.
Energy Reduce energy use, especially when the printer is idle.
Notes:
•Printer engine motors do not start until a document is ready to print. You may notice a short
delay before the first page is printed.
•The printer enters Sleep mode after one minute of inactivity.
•The printer display is turned off when the printer is in Sleep mode.
•Lights on the staple finisher and other optional finishers are turned off when the printer is in
Sleep mode.
Energy/Paper Use all the settings associated with Energy and Paper modes.
Plain Paper Enable the automatic two‑sided (duplex) printing feature.
4Click Submit.
Reducing printer noise
Enable Quiet mode to reduce printer noise.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > General Settings > Quiet Mode.
3Select a setting.
Using M5155 and M5163 87
Use To
On Reduce printer noise.
Notes:
•Print jobs process at a reduced speed.
•Printer engine motors do not start until a document
is ready to print. There is a short delay before the
first page is printed.
•The alarm control and cartridge alarm sounds are
turned off.
•The printer ignores the Advance Start command.
Off Use factory default settings.
Note: This setting supports the performance
specifications of the printer.
4Click Submit.
Adjusting Sleep mode
To save energy, decrease the number of minutes before the printer enters Sleep mode. Select from 1 to 120. The factory
default setting is 30 minutes.
Using the Embedded Web Server
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > General Settings > Timeouts.
3In the Sleep Mode field, enter the number of minutes you want for the printer to wait before it enters Sleep Mode.
4Click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Timeouts > Sleep Mode
2In the Sleep Mode field, select the number of minutes you want for the printer to wait before it enters Sleep Mode.
3Touch .
Using M5155 and M5163 88
Using Hibernate Mode
Hibernate is an ultra‑low power operating mode. When operating in Hibernate mode, the printer is essentially off, and
all other systems and devices are powered down safely.
Note: The Hibernate and Sleep modes can be scheduled.
Using the Embedded Web Server
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > General Settings > Sleep Button Settings.
3From the Press Sleep Button or Press and Hold Sleep Button drop‑down menu, select Hibernate.
4Click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings
2Touch Press Sleep Button or Press and Hold Sleep Button.
3Touch Hibernate > .
Adjusting the brightness of the display
To save energy, or if you are have trouble reading your display, adjust the brightness of the display.
Available settings range from 20–100. The factory default setting is 100.
Using the Embedded Web Server
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated
by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > General Settings.
3In the Screen Brightness field, enter the brightness percentage you want for the display.
4Click Submit.
Using M5155 and M5163 89
Using the printer control panel
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Screen Brightness
2In the Screen Brightness field, enter the brightness percentage you want for the display.
3Touch .
Restoring factory default settings
If you want to keep a list of the current menu settings for reference, then print a menu settings page before restoring
the factory default settings. For more information, see “Printing a menu settings page” on page 85.
If you want a more comprehensive method of restoring the printer factory default settings, then perform the Wipe All
Settings option. For more information, see “Erasing non‑volatile memory” on page 92.
Warning—Potential Damage: Restoring factory defaults returns most printer settings to the original factory default
settings. Exceptions include the display language, custom sizes and messages, and network/port menu settings. All
downloads stored in the RAM are deleted. Downloads stored in the flash memory or in a printer hard disk are not
affected.
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Factory Defaults > Restore Now >
Securing the printer
Using the security lock feature
The printer is equipped with a security lock feature. When a lock compatible with most laptop computers is attached,
the printer is locked. When locked, the controller board shield and the controller board cannot be removed. Attach a
security lock to the printer in the location shown.
Using M5155 and M5163 90
Statement of Volatility
Your printer contains various types of memory that can store device and network settings, and user data.
Type of memory Description
Volatile memory Your printer uses standard random access memory (RAM) to
temporarily buffer user data during simple print jobs.
Non-volatile memory Your printer may use two forms of non-volatile memory:
EEPROM and NAND (flash memory). Both types are used to
store the operating system, device settings, network
information, bookmark settings, and embedded solutions.
Hard disk memory Some printers have a hard disk drive installed. The printer
hard disk is designed for device-specific functionality. This lets
the device retain buffered user data from complex print jobs,
as well as form data, and font data.
Erase the content of any installed printer memory in the following circumstances:
•The printer is being decommissioned.
•The printer hard disk is being replaced.
•The printer is being moved to a different department or location.
•The printer is being serviced by someone from outside your organization.
•The printer is being removed from your premises for service.
•The printer is being sold to another organization.
Disposing of a printer hard disk
Note: Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed.
In high‑security environments, it may be necessary to take additional steps to make sure that confidential data stored
in the printer hard disk cannot be accessed when the printer—or its hard disk—is removed from your premises.
•Degaussing—Flushes the hard disk with a magnetic field that erases stored data
•Crushing—Physically compresses the hard disk to break component parts and render them unreadable
•Milling—Physically shreds the hard disk into small metal bits
Note: Most data can be erased electronically, but the only way to guarantee that all data is completely erased is to
physically destroy each hard disk where data is stored.
Erasing volatile memory
The volatile memory (RAM) installed in your printer requires a power source to retain information. To erase the buffered
data, simply turn off the printer.
Using M5155 and M5163 91
Erasing non‑volatile memory
Erase individual settings, device and network settings, security settings, and embedded solutions by following these
steps:
1Turn off the printer.
2Hold down 2 and 6 on the keypad while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the
progress bar appears.
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. When the printer is fully
turned on, a list of functions appears on the printer display instead of the standard home screen icons.
3Touch Wipe All Settings.
The printer will restart several times during this process.
Note: Wipe All Settings securely removes device settings, solutions, jobs, and passwords from the printer
memory.
4Touch Back > Exit Config Menu.
The printer will perform a power‑on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.
Erasing printer hard disk memory
Note: Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed.
Configuring Disk Wiping in the printer menus lets you remove residual confidential material left by print jobs by securely
overwriting files that have been marked for deletion.
Using the printer control panel
1Turn off the printer.
2Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar
appears.
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. When the printer is fully
turned on, a list of functions appears on the printer display.
3Touch Wipe Disk, and then touch one of the following:
•Wipe disk (fast)—This lets you overwrite the disk with all zeroes in a single pass.
•Wipe disk (secure)—This lets you overwrite the disk with random bit patterns several times, followed by a
verification pass. A secure overwrite is compliant with the DoD 5220.22‑M standard for securely erasing data
from a hard disk. Highly confidential information should be wiped using this method.
4Touch Yes to proceed with disk wiping.
Notes:
•A status bar will indicate the progress of the disk wiping task.
•Disk wiping can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be unavailable
for other user tasks.
5Touch Back > Exit Config Menu.
The printer will perform a power‑on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.
Using M5155 and M5163 92
Configuring printer hard disk encryption
Enable hard disk encryption to prevent loss of sensitive data in the event the printer or its hard disk is stolen.
Note: Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed.
Using the Embedded Web Server
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Security > Disk Encryption.
Note: Disk Encryption appears in the Security Menu only when a formatted, non‑defective printer hard disk is
installed.
3From the Disk encryption menu, select Enable.
Notes:
•Enabling disk encryption will erase the contents of the printer hard disk.
•Disk encryption can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be
unavailable for other user tasks.
4Click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1Turn off the printer.
2Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar
appears.
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. When the printer is fully
turned on, a list of functions appears on the printer display.
3Touch Disk Encryption > Enable.
Note: Enabling disk encryption will erase the contents of the printer hard disk.
4Touch Yes to proceed with disk wiping.
Notes:
•Do not turn off the printer during the encryption process. Doing so may result in loss of data.
•Disk encryption can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be
unavailable for other user tasks.
•A status bar will indicate the progress of the disk wiping task. After the disk has been encrypted, the printer
will return to the Enable/Disable screen.
5Touch Back > Exit Config Menu.
The printer will perform a power‑on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.
Using M5155 and M5163 93
Finding printer security information
In high-security environments, you may need to take additional steps to make sure that confidential data stored in the
printer cannot be accessed. For more information, visit the Lexmark security Web page or see the Embedded Web
Server Administrator’s Guide.
1Go to http://support.lexmark.com, and then navigate to:
Support & Downloads > Tech Library > Manuals & Guides
2Type Embedded Web Server in the keyword field, and then click Filter.
3Click Embedded Web Server to launch the document.
Using M5155 and M5163 94
Using M5170
Learning about the printer
Printer configurations
Basic model
1
2
43
1Standard bin
2Printer control panel
3Multipurpose feeder
4Standard 550‑sheet tray (Tray 1)
Fully configured model
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must
use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options. If you purchased a printer with
a similar configuration, then you may need additional furniture. For more information, see
www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
Using M5170 95
The following illustration shows the maximum number of optional finishers and trays that are supported by the printer.
For more information on other configurations, visit www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
6
1
2
7
8
5
4
3
Hardware option Alternative hardware option
1Staple finisher •Output expander
•4‑bin mailbox
24‑bin mailbox •Output expander
•High‑capacity output expander
•Staple finisher
3Caster base None
42100‑sheet tray None
5550‑sheet tray 250‑sheet tray
6250‑sheet tray 550‑sheet tray
74‑bin mailbox Output expander
8Output expander 4‑bin mailbox
•In a configuration with three optional finishers, the output expander and mailbox may be installed in any order.
•In a configuration with two optional finishers:
–The staple finisher must always be on top.
–The high‑capacity output expander must always be at the bottom.
–The output expander is the only finisher that can be placed on top of the high‑capacity output expander.
Using M5170 96
•When using optional trays:
–Always use a caster base when the printer is configured with a 2100‑sheet tray.
–The 2100‑sheet tray must always be at the bottom of a configuration.
–A maximum of four optional trays may be configured with the printer.
–The optional 250‑ and 550‑sheet trays may be installed in any order.
Using the printer control panel
4
123
5
6
7
Use the To
1Display •View the status of the printer.
•Set up and operate the printer.
2Home button Go to the home screen.
3Sleep button Enable Sleep mode or Hibernate mode.
Do the following to wake the printer from Sleep mode:
•Press and release the Sleep button.
•Touch the screen or press any hard button.
•Open a tray, cover, or door.
•Send a print job from the computer.
•Perform a power‑on reset with the main power switch.
•Attach a device to a USB port.
4Keypad Enter numbers, letters, or symbols on the printer.
5Stop or Cancel button Stop all printer activity.
6Indicator light Check the status of the printer.
7USB port Connect a USB Bluetooth adapter or a flash drive to the printer.
Note: Only the front USB port supports flash drives.
Understanding the colors of the Sleep button and indicator lights
The colors of the Sleep button and indicator lights on the printer control panel signify a certain printer status or condition.
Using M5170 97
Indicator light color and its corresponding printer status
Indicator light Printer status
Off The printer is off or in Hibernate mode.
Blinking green The printer is warming up, processing data, or printing.
Solid green The printer is on, but idle.
Blinking red The printer requires user intervention.
Sleep button light color and its corresponding printer status
Sleep button light Printer status
Off The printer is off, idle or in Ready state.
Solid amber The printer is in Sleep mode.
Blinking amber The printer is entering or waking from Hibernate mode.
Blinking amber for 0.1 second, then goes
completely off for 1.9 seconds in a slow,
pulsing pattern
The printer is in Hibernate mode.
Understanding the home screen
When the printer is turned on, the display shows a basic screen, referred to as the home screen. Use the home screen
buttons and icons to initiate an action.
Note: Your home screen may vary depending on your home screen customization settings, administrative setup, and
active embedded solutions.
1234
5
6
7
8
Touch To
1Search Held Jobs Search current held jobs.
2Held Jobs Display all current held jobs.
3Forms and Favorites Access frequently used online forms.
4Eco‑Settings Adjust energy consumption, noise, toner and paper usage.
Using M5170 98
Touch To
5Menus Access printer menus.
Note: These menus are available only when the printer is in Ready state.
6Status message bar •Show the current printer status such as Ready or Busy.
•Show printer conditions such as Imaging unit low or Cartridge Low.
•Show intervention messages and the instructions on how to clear them.
7Status/Supplies •Show a printer warning or error message whenever the printer requires intervention to
continue processing.
•View more information on the printer warning or message, and on how to clear it.
8Tips Open a context‑sensitive Help information on the printer control panel.
Features
Feature Description
Attendance message alert If an attendance message affects a function, then this icon appears and the red
indicator light blinks.
Warning If an error condition occurs, then this icon appears.
Printer IP address
Example: 123.123.123.123
The IP address of your network printer is located at the top left corner of the home
screen and appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods. You can use the
IP address when accessing the Embedded Web Server so you can view and remotely
configure printer settings even when you are not physically near the printer.
Using the touch-screen buttons
Note: Your home screen, icons, and buttons may vary, depending on your home screen customization settings,
administrative setup, and active embedded solutions.
Using M5170 99
123
4
5
6
7
8
Touch To
1Left arrow Scroll to the left.
2Right arrow Scroll to the right.
3Up arrow Scroll up.
4Down arrow Scroll down.
5 Submit Submit changes made in the printer settings.
6Back Return to the previous screen.
7Home Return to the home screen.
8Tips Open a context-sensitive Help dialog on the printer control panel.
Using M5170 100
Other touch-screen buttons
Touch To
Accept Save settings.
Cancel •Cancel an action or a selection.
•Leave a screen and return to the previous screen without saving changes.
Increase Select a higher value.
Decrease Select a lower value.
Exit Leave the current screen.
Search Search current held jobs.
Warning View a warning or error message.
Using M5170 101
Setting up and using the home screen applications
Notes:
•Your home screen may vary depending on your home screen customization settings, administrative setup, and
active embedded applications. Some applications are supported only in select printer models.
•There may be additional solutions and applications available for purchase. For more information, visit
www.lexmark.com or inquire at your point of purchase.
Finding the IP address of the computer
Note: Make sure that you know how your printer and computer are connected to the network (Ethernet or
wireless).
For Windows users
1Open the command window.
In Windows 8
From the Search charm, type run, and then navigate to:
Apps list > Run > type cmd > OK
In Windows 7 or earlier
aClick or click Start, and then click Run.
bIn the Start Search or Run dialog, type cmd.
cPress Enter, or click OK.
2Type ipconfig, and then click Go or press Enter.
Note: Type ipconfig /all to see additional useful information.
3Look for IP Address.
The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
For Macintosh users
Note: This is applicable only in Mac OS X version 10.5 or later.
1From the Apple menu, navigate to:
System Preferences > Network
2Click Ethernet, Wi‑Fi, or AirPort.
3Click Advanced > TCP/IP.
4Look for IPv4 Address.
Finding the IP address of the printer
Note: Make sure your printer is connected to a network or to a print server.
Using M5170 102
You can find the printer IP address:
•From the top left corner of the printer home screen.
•From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu.
•By printing a network setup page or menu settings page, and then finding the TCP/IP section.
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
Accessing the Embedded Web Server
The Embedded Web Server is the printer Web page that lets you view and remotely configure printer settings even
when you are not physically near the printer.
1Obtain the printer IP address:
•From the printer control panel home screen
•From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu
•By printing a network setup page or menu settings page, and then finding the TCP/IP section
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
3Press Enter.
Note: If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
Customizing the home screen
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2Do one or more of the following:
•Show or hide icons of basic printer functions.
aClick Settings > General Settings > Home screen customization.
bSelect the check boxes to specify which icons appear on the printer home screen.
Note: If you clear a check box beside an icon, then the icon does not appear on the home screen.
cClick Submit.
•Customize the icon for an application. For more information, see “Finding information about the home screen
applications” on page 103 or see the documentation that came with the application.
Activating the home screen applications
Finding information about the home screen applications
Your printer comes with preinstalled home screen applications. Before you can use these applications, you must first
activate and set up these applications using the Embedded Web Server. For more information on accessing the
Embedded Web Server, see “Accessing the Embedded Web Server” on page 55.
Using M5170 103
For more information on configuring and using the home screen applications, do the following:
1Go to http://support.lexmark.com, and then do either of the following:
•Click Business Solutions, and then select the name of the application.
•Click Software and Solutions, and then select either of the following:
–Scan to Network—Find information about the Scan to Network application.
–Other Applications—Find information about the other applications.
2Click the Manuals tab, and then select the document for the home screen application.
Using Background and Idle Screen
Use To
Customize the background and idle screen of your printer home screen.
From the home screen, navigate to:
Change Background > select background to use > Apply
Setting up Forms and Favorites
Note: A later version of this User's Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator’s Guide of this application. To
check for updates of this User’s Guide, visit http://support.lexmark.com.
Use To
Quickly find and print frequently used online forms directly from the printer home screen.
Note: The printer must have permission to access the network folder, FTP site, or Web site where the
bookmark is stored. From the computer where the bookmark is stored, use sharing, security, and
firewall settings to allow the printer at least a read access. For help, see the documentation that
came with your operating system.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management > Forms and Favorites.
3Click Add, and then customize the settings.
Notes:
•See the mouse-over help beside each field for a description of the setting.
Using M5170 104
•To make sure the location settings of the bookmark are correct, type the correct IP address of the host
computer where the bookmark is located. For more information on obtaining the IP address of the host
computer, see “Finding the IP address of the computer” on page 54.
•Make sure the printer has access rights to the folder where the bookmark is located.
4Click Apply.
To use the application, touch Forms and Favorites on the printer home screen, and then navigate through form
categories, or search for forms based on a form number, name, or description.
Understanding Eco‑Settings
Use To
Manage energy consumption, noise, toner, and paper usage settings to help reduce the environmental
impact of your printer.
Setting up Remote Operator Panel
This application shows the printer control panel on your computer screen and lets you interact with the printer control
panel, even when you are not physically near the network printer. From your computer screen, you can view the printer
status, release held print jobs, create bookmarks, and do other print-related tasks you might normally perform on the
network printer.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2Click Settings > Remote Operator Panel Settings.
3Select the Enabled check box, and then customize the settings.
4Click Submit.
To use the application, click Remote Operator Panel > Launch VNC Applet.
Using M5170 105
Exporting and importing a configuration
You can export configuration settings into a text file, and then import the file to apply the settings to other printers.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2To export or import a configuration for one application, do the following:
aClick Settings > Apps > Apps Management.
bFrom the list of installed applications, click the name of the application you want to configure.
cClick Configure, and then do either of the following:
•To export a configuration to a file, click Export, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen to
save the configuration file.
Notes:
–When saving the configuration file, you can type a unique file name or use the default name.
–If a "JVM Out of Memory” error occurs, then repeat the export process until the configuration file is
saved.
•To import a configuration from a file, click Import, and then browse to the saved configuration file that was
exported from a previously configured printer.
Notes:
–Before importing the configuration file, you can choose to preview it first or load it directly.
–If a timeout occurs and a blank screen appears, then refresh the Web browser, and then click Apply.
3To export or import a configuration for multiple applications, do the following:
aClick Settings > Import/Export.
bDo either of the following:
•To export a configuration file, click Export Embedded Solutions Settings File, and then follow the instructions
on the computer screen to save the configuration file.
•To import a configuration file, do the following:
1Click Import Embedded Solutions Settings File > Choose File, and then browse to the saved configuration
file that was exported from a previously configured printer.
2Click Submit.
Loading paper and specialty media
The selection and handling of paper and specialty media can affect how reliably documents print. For more information,
see “Avoiding jams” on page 222 and “Storing paper” on page 147.
Setting the paper size and type
From the home screen navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Paper Size/Type > select a tray > select a paper size or type > Submit
Using M5170 106
Notes:
•The paper size is automatically set according to the position of the paper guides in each tray except the
multipurpose feeder.
•The paper size for the multipurpose feeder must be set manually from the Paper Size menu.
•The paper type must be set manually for all trays that do not contain plain paper.
Configuring Universal paper settings
Universal paper size is a user‑defined setting that lets you print on paper sizes that are not preset in the printer menus.
Notes:
•The smallest supported Universal size is 70 x 127 mm (2.76 x 5 inches) for one‑sided printing and
105 x 148 mm (4.13 x 5.83 inches) for two‑sided (duplex) printing.
•The largest supported Universal size is 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches) for one‑sided and two‑sided printing.
•When printing on paper less than 210 mm (8.3 inches) wide, the printer prints at a reduced speed to prevent
damage to the fuser.
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Universal Setup > Units of Measure > select a unit of measure
2Touch Portrait Width or Portrait Height.
3Select the width or height, and then touch Submit.
Loading the 250‑ or 550‑sheet tray
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each tray separately. Keep all
other trays closed until needed.
1Pull out the tray.
Notes:
•When loading Folio‑, legal‑, or Oficio‑size paper, lift the tray slightly and then pull it out.
•Do not remove trays while a job prints or while Busy appears on the display. Doing so may cause a jam.
Using M5170 107
2Squeeze and slide the width guide to the correct position for the size of the paper being loaded until it clicks into
place.
2
1
Note: Use the paper size indicators on the bottom of the tray to help position the guides.
Using M5170 108
3Unlock the length guide, and then squeeze and slide the guide to the correct position for the size of the paper being
loaded.
3
12
Notes:
•Lock the length guide for all paper sizes.
•Use the paper size indicators on the bottom of the tray to help position the guides.
Using M5170 109
4Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the
edges on a level surface.
5Load the paper stack with the printable side facedown.
Note: Make sure the paper or envelope is loaded properly.
•There are different ways of loading letterhead depending on whether an optional staple finisher is installed or
not.
Without an optional staple finisher With an optional staple finisher
ABC
One‑sided printing One‑sided printing
Using M5170 110
Without an optional staple finisher With an optional staple finisher
ABC
Two‑sided printing
ABC
Two‑sided printing
•If you are loading prepunched paper for use with the staple finisher, then make sure the holes on the long edge
of the paper are on the right side of the tray.
One‑sided printing Two‑sided printing
ABC
Note: If the holes on the long edge of the paper are on the left side of the tray, then a jam may occur.
•Do not slide the paper into the tray. Load paper as shown in the illustration.
Using M5170 111
•If you are loading envelopes, then make sure that the flap side is facing up and the envelopes are on the left
side of the tray.
•Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper fill indicator.
Warning—Potential Damage: Overfilling the tray can cause paper jams.
6For custom‑ or Universal‑size paper, adjust the paper guides to lightly touch the sides of the stack, and then lock
the length guide.
Using M5170 112
7Insert the tray.
8From the printer control panel, set the paper size and type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the
tray.
Note: Set the correct paper size and type to avoid paper jams and print quality problems.
Loading the 2100‑sheet tray
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each tray separately. Keep all
other trays closed until needed.
1Pull out the tray.
2Adjust the width and length guides.
Loading A5‑size paper
aPull up and slide the width guide to the position for A5.
LGL
OFC
FOLIO
LTR
A4
A5
1
LGL
OFC
FOLIO
LTR
A4
A5
2
LGL
OFC
FOLIO
LTR
A4
A5
Using M5170 113
bSqueeze and slide the length guide to the position for A5 until it clicks into place.
12
cRemove the A5 length guide from its holder.
12
dInsert the A5 length guide into its designated slot.
Note: Press the A5 length guide until it clicks into place.
Using M5170 114
Loading A4‑, letter‑, legal‑, oficio‑, and folio‑size paper
aPull up and slide the width guide to the correct position for the size of the paper being loaded.
LGL
OFC
FOLIO
LTR
A4
A5
1
LGL
OFC
FOLIO
LTR
A4
A5
2
LGL
OFC
FOLIO
LTR
A4
A5
bIf the A5 length guide is still attached to the length guide, then remove it from its place. If the A5 length guide
is not attached, then proceed to step d.
Using M5170 115
cPut the A5 length guide in its holder.
2
1
dSqueeze the length guide and slide it to the correct position for the size of the paper being loaded until it clicks
into place.
LGL
OFC
FOLIO
LTR
A4
A5
Using M5170 116
3Flex sheets of paper back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten
the edges on a level surface.
4Load the paper stack with the printable side facedown.
Note: Make sure the paper is loaded properly.
•There are different ways of loading letterhead depending on whether an optional staple finisher is installed or
not.
Without an optional staple finisher With an optional staple finisher
ABC
One‑sided printing
ABC
One‑sided printing
ABC
Two‑sided printing
ABC
Two‑sided printing
•If you are loading prepunched paper for use with the staple finisher, then make sure the holes on the long edge
of the paper are on the right side of the tray.
Using M5170 117
One‑sided printing Two‑sided printing
ABC
ABC
Note: If the holes on the long edge of the paper are on the left side of the tray, then a jam may occur.
•Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper fill indicator.
Warning—Potential Damage: Overfilling the tray can cause paper jams.
5Insert the tray.
Note: Press the paper stack down while inserting the tray.
Using M5170 118
LGL
OFC
FOLIO
LTR
A4
A5
6From the printer control panel, set the paper size and type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded.
Note: Set the correct paper size and type to avoid paper jams and print quality problems.
Loading the multipurpose feeder
1Pull down the multipurpose feeder door.
Note: Do not load or close the multipurpose feeder while a job is printing.
B5
EXEC
A4 A5
LTR
Using M5170 119
2Using the handle, pull the multipurpose feeder extender.
B5
EXEC
A4 A5
LTR
Note: Guide the extender gently so that the multipurpose feeder is fully extended and open.
3Slide the width guide to the correct position for the size of the paper being loaded.
B5
EXEC
A4 A5
LTR
Note: Use the paper size indicators on the bottom of tray to help position the guides.
Using M5170 120
B5
EXEC
A4 A5
LTR
4Prepare the paper or specialty media for loading.
•Flex sheets of paper back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten
the edges on a level surface.
•Hold transparencies by the edges, and then fan them. Straighten the edges on a level surface.
Note: Avoid touching the printable side of the transparencies. Be careful not to scratch them.
•Flex the stack of envelopes back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Straighten the edges on a level
surface.
5Load the paper or specialty media.
Note: Slide the stack gently into the multipurpose feeder until it comes to a stop.
•Load only one size and type of paper or specialty media at a time.
•Make sure the paper fits loosely in the multipurpose feeder, lies flat and is not bent or wrinkled.
Using M5170 121
•There are different ways of loading letterhead depending on whether an optional staple finisher is installed or
not.
Without an optional staple finisher With an optional staple finisher
ABC
One‑sided printing
ABC
One‑sided printing
ABC
Two‑sided printing
ABC
Two‑sided printing
•If you are loading prepunched paper for use with the staple finisher, then make sure the holes on the long edge
of the paper are on the right side of the tray.
One‑sided printing Two‑sided printing
ABC
Note: If the holes on the long edge of the paper are on the left side of the tray, then a jam may occur.
Using M5170 122
•Load envelopes with the flap side down and on the left of the multipurpose feeder.
B5
EXEC
A4 A5
LTR
Warning—Potential Damage: Never use envelopes with stamps, clasps, snaps, windows, coated linings, or
self‑stick adhesives. These envelopes may severely damage the printer.
•Make sure the paper or specialty media is below the maximum paper fill indicator.
Warning—Potential Damage: Overfilling the feeder can cause paper jams.
6For custom- or Universal-size paper, adjust the width guides to lightly touch the sides of the stack.
7From the printer control panel, set the paper size and type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the
tray.
Note: Set the correct paper size and type to avoid paper jams and print quality problems.
Using M5170 123
Linking and unlinking trays
Linking and unlinking trays
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Paper Menu.
3Change the paper size and type settings for the trays you are linking.
•To link trays, make sure the paper size and type for the tray match that of the other tray.
•To unlink trays, make sure the paper size or type for the tray does not match that of the other tray.
4Click Submit.
Note: You can also change the paper size and type settings using the printer control panel. For more information,
see “Setting the paper size and type” on page 106.
Warning—Potential Damage: Paper loaded in the tray should match the paper type name assigned in the printer.
The temperature of the fuser varies according to the specified paper type. Printing issues may occur if settings are
not properly configured.
Creating a custom name for a paper type
Using the Embedded Web Server
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Paper Menu > Custom Names.
3Select a custom name, and then type a custom paper type name.
4Click Submit.
5Click Custom Types, and then verify if the new custom paper type name has replaced the custom name.
Using the printer control panel
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Custom Names
2Select a custom name, and then type a custom paper type name.
Using M5170 124
3Touch Submit.
4Touch Custom Types, and then verify if the new custom paper type name has replaced the custom name.
Assigning a custom paper type
Using the Embedded Web Server
Assign a custom paper type name to a tray when linking or unlinking trays.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Paper Menu > Custom Types.
3Select a custom paper type name, and then select a paper type.
Note: Paper is the factory default paper type for all user‑defined custom names.
4Click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Custom Types
2Select a custom paper type name, and then select a paper type.
Note: Paper is the factory default paper type for all user‑defined custom names.
3Touch Submit.
Printing
Printing a document
Printing forms
Use the Forms and Favorites application to quickly and easily access frequently used forms or other information that
is regularly printed. Before you can use this application, first set it up on the printer. For more information, see “Setting
up Forms and Favorites” on page 104.
1From the printer home screen, navigate to:
Forms and Favorites > select the form from the list > enter the number of copies > adjust other settings
2Depending on your printer model, touch , , or Submit.
Using M5170 125
Printing a document
1From the printer control panel, set the paper type and size to match the paper loaded.
2Send the print job:
For Windows users
aWith a document open, click File > Print.
bClick Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
cAdjust the settings, if necessary.
dClick OK > Print.
For Macintosh users
aCustomize the settings in the Page Setup dialog:
1With a document open, choose File > Page Setup.
2Choose a paper size or create a custom size to match the paper loaded.
3Click OK.
bCustomize the settings in the Print dialog:
1With a document open, choose File > Print.
If necessary, click the disclosure triangle to see more options.
2From the print options pop‑up menus, adjust the settings, if necessary.
Note: To print on a specific paper type, adjust the paper type setting to match the paper loaded, or
select the appropriate tray or feeder.
3Click Print.
Printing from a mobile device
For the list of supported mobile devices and to download a compatible mobile printing application, visit
http://lexmark.com/mobile.
Note: Mobile printing applications may also be available from your mobile device manufacturer.
Adjusting toner darkness
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Print Settings > Quality Menu > Toner Darkness.
3Adjust the toner darkness, and then click Submit.
Using M5170 126
Using the printer control panel
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > Print Settings > Quality Menu > Toner Darkness
2Adjust the setting, and then touch Submit.
Printing from a flash drive
Supported flash drives and file types
Notes:
•High‑speed USB flash drives must support the full‑speed standard. Low-speed USB devices are not supported.
•USB flash drives must support the File Allocation Table (FAT) system. Devices formatted with New Technology
File System (NTFS) or any other file system are not supported.
Recommended flash drives File type
•Lexar JumpDrive FireFly (512MB and 1GB)
•SanDisk Cruzer Micro (512MB and 1GB)
•Sony Micro Vault Classic (512MB and 1GB)
Documents:
•.pdf
•.xps
Images:
•.dcx
•.gif
•.jpeg or .jpg
•.bmp
•.pcx
•.tiff or .tif
•.png
•.fls
Using M5170 127
Printing from a flash drive
Notes:
•Before printing an encrypted PDF file, you will be prompted to type the file password from the printer control
panel.
•You cannot print files for which you do not have printing permissions.
1Insert a flash drive into the USB port.
Notes:
•A flash drive icon appears on the printer home screen when a flash drive is inserted.
•If you insert the flash drive when the printer requires attention, such as when a jam has occurred, then the
printer ignores the flash drive.
•If you insert the flash drive while the printer is processing other print jobs, then Busy appears. After these
print jobs are processed, you may need to view the held jobs list to print documents from the flash drive.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the USB cable, any wireless network adapter, any connector, the
memory device, or the printer in the areas shown while actively printing, reading, or writing from the memory
device. Loss of data can occur.
2From the printer control panel, touch the document you want to print.
Using M5170 128
3Touch the arrows to specify the number of copies for printing, and then touch Print.
Notes:
•Do not remove the flash drive from the USB port until the document has finished printing.
•If you leave the flash drive in the printer after leaving the initial USB menu screen, then touch Held Jobs on
the home screen to print files from the flash drive.
Printing confidential and other held jobs
Storing print jobs in the printer
1From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Security > Confidential Print > select the print job type
Use To
Max Invalid PIN Limit the number of times an invalid PIN can be entered.
Note: When the limit is reached, the print jobs for that user name and PIN
are deleted.
Confidential Job Expiration Hold print jobs in the computer until you enter the PIN from the printer control
panel.
Note: The PIN is set from the computer. It must be four digits, using the
numbers 1–9.
Repeat Job Expiration Print and store print jobs in the printer memory.
Verify Job Expiration Print one copy of a print job and hold the remaining copies. It allows you to
examine if the first copy is satisfactory. The print job is automatically deleted
from the printer memory when all copies are printed.
Reserve Job Expiration Store print jobs for printing at a later time.
Note: The print jobs are held until deleted from the Held Jobs menu.
Notes:
•Confidential, Verify, Reserve, and Repeat print jobs may be deleted if the printer requires extra memory to
process additional held jobs.
•You can set the printer to store print jobs in the printer memory until you start the print job from the printer
control panel.
•All print jobs that can be initiated by the user at the printer are called held jobs.
2Touch Submit.
Printing confidential and other held jobs
Note: Confidential and Verify print jobs are automatically deleted from memory after printing. Repeat and Reserve
jobs are held in the printer until you delete them.
For Windows users
1With a document open, click File > Print.
2Click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
Using M5170 129
3Click Print and Hold.
4Select the print job type (Confidential, Repeat, Reserve, or Verify), and then assign a user name. For a confidential
print job, also enter a four‑digit PIN.
5Click OK or Print.
6From the printer home screen, release the print job.
•For confidential print jobs, navigate to:
Held jobs > select your user name > Confidential Jobs > enter the PIN > select the print job > specify the number
of copies > Print
•For other print jobs, navigate to:
Held jobs > select your user name > select the print job > specify the number of copies > Print
For Macintosh users
1With a document open, choose File > Print.
If necessary, click the disclosure triangle to see more options.
2From the print options or Copies & Pages pop‑up menu, choose Job Routing.
3Select the print job type (Confidential, Repeat, Reserve, or Verify), and then assign a user name. For a confidential
print job, also enter a four‑digit PIN.
4Click OK or Print.
5From the printer home screen, release the print job.
•For confidential print jobs, navigate to:
Held jobs > select your user name > Confidential Jobs > enter the PIN > select the print job > specify the number
of copies > Print
•For other print jobs, navigate to:
Held jobs > select your user name > select the print job > specify the number of copies > Print
Printing information pages
Printing a font sample list
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Reports > Print Fonts
2Touch PCL Fonts or PostScript Fonts.
Printing a directory list
A directory list shows the resources stored in a flash memory or in the printer hard disk.
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Reports > Print Directory
Using M5170 130
Canceling a print job
Canceling a print job from the printer control panel
1Touch Cancel Jobs on the printer control panel, or press on the keypad.
2Touch the print job you want to cancel, and then touch Delete Selected Jobs.
Canceling a print job from the computer
For Windows users
1Open the printers folder.
In Windows 8
From the Search charm, type Run, and then navigate to:
Apps list > Run > type control printers > OK
In Windows 7 or earlier
aClick , or click Start and then click Run.
bIn the Start Search or Run dialog, type control printers.
cPress Enter, or click OK.
2Double‑click the printer icon.
3Select the print job you want to cancel.
4Click Delete.
For Macintosh users
1From the Apple menu, navigate to either of the following:
•System Preferences > Print & Scan > select your printer > Open Print Queue
•System Preferences > Print & Fax > select your printer > Open Print Queue
2From the printer window, select the print job you want to cancel, and then delete it.
Managing your printer
Finding advanced networking and administrator information
This chapter covers basic administrative support tasks using the Embedded Web Server. For more advanced system
support tasks, see the Networking Guide on the Software CD or the Embedded Web Server Administrator's Guide at
http://support.lexmark.com.
Checking the virtual display
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Using M5170 131
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Check the virtual display that appears in the top left corner of the screen.
The virtual display works as an actual display would work on a printer control panel.
Configuring supply notifications from the Embedded Web Server
You can determine how you would like to be notified when supplies run nearly low, low, very low, or reach their
end‑of‑life by setting the selectable alerts.
Notes:
•Selectable alerts can be set on the toner cartridge, imaging unit, and maintenance kit.
•All selectable alerts can be set for nearly low, low, and very low supply conditions. Not all selectable alerts can
be set for the end‑of‑life supply condition. E‑mail selectable alert is available for all supply conditions.
•The percentage of estimated remaining supply that prompts the alert can be set on some supplies for some
supply conditions.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears as four
sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Print Settings > Supply Notifications.
3From the drop‑down menu for each supply, select one of the following notification options:
Notification Description
Off The normal printer behavior for all supplies occurs.
E‑mail Only The printer generates an e-mail when the supply condition is reached. The status of the
supply will appear on the menus page and status page.
Warning The printer displays the warning message and generates an email about the status of the
supply. The printer does not stop when the supply condition is reached.
Continuable Stop1The printer stops processing jobs when the supply condition is reached, and the user needs
to press a button to continue printing.
Non Continuable Stop1,2 The printer stops when the supply condition is reached. The supply must be replaced to
continue printing.
1 The printer generates an e-mail about the status of the supply when supply notification is enabled.
2 The printer stops when some supplies become empty to prevent damage.
4Click Submit.
Using M5170 132
Modifying confidential print settings
Note: This feature is available only in network printers or printers connected to print servers.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Configuration > Other Settings tab > Security > Confidential Print Setup.
3Modify the settings:
•Set a maximum number of PIN entry attempts. When a user exceeds a specific number of PIN entry attempts,
all of the jobs for that user are deleted.
•Set an expiration time for confidential print jobs. When a user has not printed the jobs within the specified time,
all of the jobs for that user are deleted.
4Save the modified settings.
Copying printer settings to other printers
Note: This feature is available only in network printers.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Copy Printer Settings.
3To change the language, select a language from the drop‑down menu, and then click Click here to submit language.
4Click Printer Settings.
5Type the IP addresses of the source and target printers.
Note: If you want to add or remove target printers, then click Add Target IP or Remove Target IP.
6Click Copy Printer Settings.
Printing a menu settings page
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Reports > Menu Settings Page
Using M5170 133
Printing a network setup page
If the printer is attached to a network, then print a network setup page to verify the network connection. This page
also provides important information that aids network printing configuration.
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Reports > Network Setup Page
2Check the first section of the network setup page and confirm that the status is Connected.
If the status is Not Connected, then the LAN drop may not be active, or the network cable may be malfunctioning.
Consult your system support person for a solution, and then print another network setup page.
Checking the status of parts and supplies
A message appears on the printer display when a replacement supply item is needed or when maintenance is required.
Checking the status of parts and supplies on the printer control panel
From the home screen, navigate to:
Status/Supplies > View Supplies
Checking the status of parts and supplies from the Embedded Web Server
Note: Make sure that the computer and printer are connected to the same network.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated
by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Device Status > More Details.
Saving energy
Using Eco‑Mode
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > General Settings > Eco‑Mode.
3Select a setting.
Using M5170 134
Use To
Off Use the factory default settings for all settings associated with Eco‑Mode.
Notes:
•Settings that were changed when other modes were selected are reset to the factory default
settings.
•Off supports the performance specifications of the printer.
Energy Reduce energy use, especially when the printer is idle.
Notes:
•Printer engine motors do not start until a document is ready to print. You may notice a short
delay before the first page is printed.
•The printer enters Sleep mode after one minute of inactivity.
•The printer display is turned off when the printer is in Sleep mode.
•Lights on the staple finisher and other optional finishers are turned off when the printer is in
Sleep mode.
Energy/Paper Use all the settings associated with Energy and Paper modes.
Plain Paper Enable the automatic two‑sided (duplex) printing feature.
4Click Submit.
Reducing printer noise
Enable Quiet mode to reduce printer noise.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > General Settings > Quiet Mode.
3Select a setting.
Using M5170 135
Use To
On Reduce printer noise.
Notes:
•Print jobs process at a reduced speed.
•Printer engine motors do not start until a document
is ready to print. There is a short delay before the
first page is printed.
•The alarm control and cartridge alarm sounds are
turned off.
•The printer will ignore the Advance Start command.
Off Use factory default settings.
Note: This setting supports the performance
specifications of the printer.
4Click Submit.
Adjusting Sleep mode
To save energy, decrease the number of minutes before the printer enters Sleep mode.
Select from 1 to 120 minutes. The factory default setting is 30 minutes.
Using the Embedded Web Server
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > General Settings > Timeouts.
3In the Sleep Mode field, enter the number of minutes you want the printer to wait before it enters Sleep mode.
4Click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Timeouts > Sleep Mode
2In the Sleep Mode field, select the number of minutes you want the printer to wait before it enters Sleep mode,
and then touch Submit.
Using M5170 136
Using Hibernate mode
Hibernate is an ultra‑low‑power operating mode. When operating in Hibernate mode, the printer is essentially off, and
all other systems and devices are turned off safely.
Note: The Hibernate and Sleep modes can be scheduled.
Using the Embedded Web Server
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > General Settings > Sleep Button Settings.
3From the “Press Sleep Button” or “Press and Hold Sleep Button” drop‑down menu, select Hibernate.
4Click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings
2From the “Press Sleep Button” or “Press and Hold Sleep Button” menu, select Hibernate, and then touch Submit.
Adjusting the brightness of the printer display
To save energy, or if you are have trouble reading from the display, adjust the brightness of the display.
Select from 20 to 100. The factory default setting is 100.
Using the Embedded Web Server
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > General Settings.
3In the Screen Brightness field, enter the brightness percentage you want for the display.
4Click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Screen Brightness
2In the Screen Brightness field, enter the brightness percentage you want for the display, and then touch Submit.
Using M5170 137
Restoring factory default settings
If you want to keep a list of the current menu settings for reference, then print a menu settings page before restoring
the factory default settings. For more information, see “Printing a menu settings page” on page 133.
If you want a more comprehensive method of restoring the printer factory default settings, then perform the Wipe All
Settings option. For more information, see “Erasing non‑volatile memory” on page 139.
Warning—Potential Damage: Restoring factory defaults returns most printer settings to the original factory default
settings. Exceptions include the display language, custom sizes and messages, and network/port menu settings. All
downloads stored in the RAM are deleted. Downloads stored in the flash memory or in a printer hard disk are not
affected.
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Factory Defaults > Restore Now > Submit
Securing the memory before moving the printer
Using the security lock feature
The printer is equipped with a security lock feature. When a lock compatible with most laptop computers is attached,
the printer is locked. When locked, the controller board shield and the controller board cannot be removed. Attach a
security lock to the printer in the location shown.
Statement of Volatility
Your printer contains various types of memory that can store device and network settings, and user data.
Using M5170 138
Type of memory Description
Volatile memory Your printer uses standard random access memory (RAM) to
temporarily buffer user data during simple print jobs.
Non-volatile memory Your printer may use two forms of non-volatile memory:
EEPROM and NAND (flash memory). Both types are used to
store the operating system, device settings, network
information, bookmark settings, and embedded solutions.
Hard disk memory Some printers have a hard disk drive installed. The printer
hard disk is designed for device-specific functionality. This lets
the device retain buffered user data from complex print jobs,
as well as form data, and font data.
Erase the content of any installed printer memory in the following circumstances:
•The printer is being decommissioned.
•The printer hard disk is being replaced.
•The printer is being moved to a different department or location.
•The printer is being serviced by someone from outside your organization.
•The printer is being removed from your premises for service.
•The printer is being sold to another organization.
Disposing of a printer hard disk
Note: Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed.
In high‑security environments, it may be necessary to take additional steps to make sure that confidential data stored
in the printer hard disk cannot be accessed when the printer—or its hard disk—is removed from your premises.
•Degaussing—Flushes the hard disk with a magnetic field that erases stored data
•Crushing—Physically compresses the hard disk to break component parts and render them unreadable
•Milling—Physically shreds the hard disk into small metal bits
Note: Most data can be erased electronically, but the only way to guarantee that all data is completely erased is to
physically destroy each hard disk where data is stored.
Erasing volatile memory
The volatile memory (RAM) installed in your printer requires a power source to retain information. To erase the buffered
data, simply turn off the printer.
Erasing non‑volatile memory
Erase individual settings, device and network settings, security settings, and embedded solutions by following these
steps:
1Turn off the printer.
2Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar
appears.
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. When the printer is fully
turned on, a list of functions appears on the printer display, instead of the standard home screen icons.
Using M5170 139
3Touch Wipe All Settings.
The printer restarts several times during this process.
Note: Wipe All Settings securely removes device settings, solutions, jobs, and passwords from the printer
memory.
4Touch Back > Exit Config Menu.
The printer will perform a power‑on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.
Erasing printer hard disk memory
Note: Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed.
Configuring Disk Wiping in the printer menus lets you remove residual confidential material left by print jobs by securely
overwriting files that have been marked for deletion.
Using the printer control panel
1Turn off the printer.
2Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar
appears.
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. When the printer is fully
turned on, a list of functions appears on the printer display.
3Touch Wipe Disk, and then touch one of the following:
•Wipe disk (fast)—This lets you overwrite the disk with all zeroes in a single pass.
•Wipe disk (secure)—This lets you overwrite the disk with random bit patterns several times, followed by a
verification pass. A secure overwrite is compliant with the DoD 5220.22‑M standard for securely erasing data
from a printer hard disk. Highly confidential information should be wiped using this method.
4Touch Yes to proceed with disk wiping.
Notes:
•A status bar indicates the progress of the disk wiping task.
•Disk wiping can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be unavailable
for other user tasks.
5Touch Back > Exit Config Menu.
The printer undergoes a power‑on reset, and then returns to normal operating mode.
Configuring printer hard disk encryption
Enable hard disk encryption to prevent loss of sensitive data in the event the printer or its hard disk is stolen.
Note: Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed.
Using the Embedded Web Server
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Using M5170 140
Notes:
•View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears as four
sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Security > Disk Encryption.
Note: Disk Encryption appears in the Security Menu only when a formatted, non‑defective printer hard disk is
installed.
3From the Disk encryption menu, select Enable.
Notes:
•Enabling disk encryption will erase the contents of the printer hard disk.
•Disk encryption can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be
unavailable for other user tasks.
4Click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1Turn off the printer.
2Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar
appears.
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. When the printer is fully
turned on, a list of functions appears on the printer display.
3Touch Disk Encryption > Enable.
Note: Enabling disk encryption will erase the contents of the printer hard disk.
4Touch Yes to proceed with disk wiping.
Notes:
•Do not turn off the printer during the encryption process. Doing so may result in loss of data.
•Disk encryption can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be
unavailable for other user tasks.
•A status bar will indicate the progress of the disk wiping task. After the disk has been encrypted, the printer
will return to the Enable/Disable screen.
5Touch Back > Exit Config Menu.
The printer will perform a power‑on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.
Finding printer security information
In high-security environments, it may be necessary to take additional steps to make sure that confidential data stored
in the printer cannot be accessed. For more information, visit the Lexmark security Web page and see the Embedded
Web Server Administrator’s Guide.
1Go to http://support.lexmark.com, and then navigate to:
Support & Downloads > Tech Library > Manuals & Guides
2Type Embedded Web Server in the keyword field, and then click Filter.
Using M5170 141
3Click Embedded Web Server to launch the document.
Using M5170 142
Paper and specialty media guide
Notes:
•Make sure the paper size, type, and weight are set correctly on the computer or printer control panel.
•Flex and straighten specialty media before loading it.
•The printer may print at a reduced speed to prevent damage to the fuser.
•For more information on card stock and labels, see the Card Stock & Label Guide on the Lexmark Web site
http://support.lexmark.com.
Using specialty media
Tips on using card stock
Card stock is heavy, single‑ply specialty media. Many of its variable characteristics, such as moisture content, thickness,
and texture, can significantly affect print quality.
•From the printer control panel, set the paper size, type, texture, and weight in the Paper menu to match the card
stock loaded in the tray.
•Print samples on the card stock being considered for use before buying large quantities.
•Specify the paper texture and weight from the tray settings to match the paper loaded in the tray.
•Preprinting, perforation, and creasing may significantly affect the print quality and cause jams or other paper feed
problems.
•Before loading the card stock on the tray, flex and fan the card stock to loosen them. Straighten the edges on a
level surface.
Tips on using envelopes
•From the printer control panel, set the paper size, type, texture, and weight in the Paper menu to match the
envelopes loaded in the tray.
•Print samples on the envelopes being considered for use before buying large quantities.
•Use envelopes designed specifically for laser printers.
•For best performance, use envelopes made from 90‑g/m2 (24‑lb) paper or 25% cotton.
•Use only new envelopes from undamaged packages.
•To optimize performance and minimize jams, do not use envelopes that:
–Have excessive curl or twist.
–Are stuck together or damaged in any way.
–Have windows, holes, perforations, cutouts, or embossing.
–Have metal clasps, string ties, or folding bars.
–Have an interlocking design.
–Have postage stamps attached.
–Have any exposed adhesive when the flap is in the sealed or closed position.
Paper and specialty media guide 143
–Have bent corners.
–Have rough, cockle, or laid finishes.
•Adjust the width guides to fit the width of the envelopes.
•Before loading the envelopes on the tray, flex the stack of envelopes back and forth to loosen them, and
then fan them. Straighten the edges on a level surface.
Note: A combination of high humidity (over 60%) and high printing temperature may wrinkle or seal envelopes.
Tips on using labels
•From the printer control panel, set the paper size, type, texture, and weight in the Paper menu to match the labels
loaded in the tray.
•Print samples on labels being considered for use before buying large quantities.
•For more information on label printing, characteristics, and design, see the Card Stock & Label Guide at
http://support.lexmark.com.
•Use labels designed specifically for laser printers.
•Do not use labels with slick backing material.
•Use full label sheets. Partial sheets may cause labels to peel off during printing, resulting in a jam. Partial sheets
also contaminate the printer and the cartridge with adhesive, and could void the printer and toner cartridge
warranties.
•Do not use labels with exposed adhesive.
•Before loading labels on the tray, flex and fan labels to loosen them. Straighten the edges on a level surface.
Tips on using transparencies
•From the printer control panel, set the paper size, type, texture, and weight in the Paper menu to match the
transparencies loaded in the tray.
•Print a test page on the transparencies being considered for use before buying large quantities.
•Use transparencies designed specifically for laser printers.
•Avoid getting fingerprints on the transparencies to prevent print quality problems.
•Before loading transparencies, flex and fan the sheets to prevent them from sticking together.
•When printing on large volumes of transparencies, make sure to print by batches of only up to 20 with an interval
of at least three minutes between batches, to prevent the transparencies from sticking together in the bin. You can
also remove transparencies from the bin by batches of 20.
Paper guidelines
Paper characteristics
The following paper characteristics affect print quality and reliability. Consider these factors before printing on them:
Paper and specialty media guide 144
Weight
The printer trays and multipurpose feeder can automatically feed paper weights between 60–176 g/m2 (16–47‑lb) grain
long paper. The 2100‑sheet tray can automatically feed paper weights up to 60–135 g/m2 (16–36‑lb) grain long paper.
Paper lighter than 60 g/m2 (16 lb) might not be stiff enough to feed properly, and may cause jams.
Note: Two‑sided printing is supported for 60–176 g/m2 (16–47‑lb) paper.
Curl
Curl is the tendency for paper to curl at its edges. Excessive curl can cause paper feeding problems. Curl can occur after
the paper passes through the printer, where it is exposed to high temperatures. Storing paper unwrapped in hot, humid,
cold, or dry conditions, even in the trays, can contribute to paper curling prior to printing and can cause feeding
problems.
Smoothness
Paper smoothness directly affects print quality. If paper is too rough, toner cannot fuse to it properly. If paper is too
smooth, it can cause paper feeding or print quality issues. Always use paper between 100 and 300 Sheffield points;
smoothness between 150 and 250 Sheffield points produces the best print quality.
Moisture content
The amount of moisture in paper affects both print quality and the ability of the printer to feed the paper correctly.
Leave paper in its original wrapper until it is time to use it. This limits the exposure of paper to moisture changes that
can degrade its performance.
Store paper in its original wrapper in the same environment as the printer for 24 to 48 hours before printing. Extend
the time several days if the storage or transportation environment is very different from the printer environment. Thick
paper may also require a longer conditioning period.
Grain direction
Grain refers to the alignment of the paper fibers in a sheet of paper. Grain is either grain long, running the length of
the paper, or grain short, running the width of the paper.
For 60–176 g/m2 (16–47‑lb) paper, grain long paper is recommended.
Fiber content
Most high‑quality xerographic paper is made from 100% chemically treated pulped wood. This content provides the
paper with a high degree of stability, resulting in fewer paper feeding problems and better print quality. Paper containing
fibers such as cotton can negatively affect paper handling.
Selecting paper
Using the appropriate paper prevents jams and helps ensure trouble‑free printing.
To help avoid paper jams and poor print quality:
•Always use new, undamaged paper.
•Before loading paper, know the recommended printable side of the paper. This information is usually indicated on
the paper package.
•Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.
Paper and specialty media guide 145
•Do not mix paper sizes, types, or weights in the same tray; mixing results in jams.
•Do not use coated papers unless they are specifically designed for electrophotographic printing.
Selecting preprinted forms and letterhead
•Use grain long for 60–90‑g/m2 (16–24‑lb) paper.
•Use only forms and letterhead printed using an offset lithographic or engraved printing process.
•Avoid paper with rough or heavily textured surfaces.
•Use inks that are not affected by the resin in toner. Inks that are oxidation‑set or oil‑based generally meet these
requirements; latex inks might not.
•Print samples on preprinted forms and letterheads considered for use before buying large quantities. This
determines whether or not the ink in the preprinted form or letterhead will affect print quality.
•When in doubt, contact your paper supplier.
Using recycled paper and other office papers
As an environmentally conscientious company, Lexmark supports the use of recycled paper produced specifically for
use in laser (electrophotographic) printers.
While no blanket statement can be made that all recycled paper will feed well, Lexmark consistently tests papers that
represent recycled cut size copier papers available on the global market. This scientific testing is conducted with rigor
and discipline. Many factors are taken into consideration both separately and as a whole, including the following:
•Amount of post-consumer waste (Lexmark tests up to 100% post-consumer waste content.)
•Temperature and humidity conditions (Testing chambers simulate climates from all over the world.)
•Moisture content (Business papers should have low moisture: 4–5%.)
•Bending resistance and proper stiffness means optimum feeding through the printer.
•Thickness (impacts how much can be loaded into a tray)
•Surface roughness (measured in Sheffield units, impacts print clarity and how well toner fuses to the paper)
•Surface friction (determines how easily sheets can be separated)
•Grain and formation (impacts curling, which also influences the mechanics of how the paper behaves as it moves
through the printer)
•Brightness and texture (look and feel)
Recycled papers are better than ever; however, the amount of recycled content in a paper affects the degree of control
over foreign matter. And while recycled papers are one good path to printing in an environmentally responsible manner,
they are not perfect. The energy required to de-ink and deal with additives such as colorants and “glue” often generates
more carbon emissions than does normal paper production. However, using recycled papers enables better resource
management overall.
Lexmark concerns itself with the responsible use of paper in general based on life cycle assessments of its products. To
gain a better understanding of the impact of printers on the environment, the company commissioned a number of
life cycle assessments and found that paper was identified as the primary contributor (up to 80%) of carbon emissions
caused throughout the entire life of a device (from design to end-of-life). This is due to the energy-intensive
manufacturing processes required to make paper.
Thus, Lexmark seeks to educate customers and partners on minimizing the impact of paper. Using recycled paper is
one way. Eliminating excessive and unnecessary paper consumption is another. Lexmark is well-equipped to help
Paper and specialty media guide 146
customers minimize printing and copying waste. In addition, the company encourages purchasing paper from suppliers
who demonstrate their commitment to sustainable forestry practices.
Lexmark does not endorse specific suppliers, although a converter’s product list for special applications is maintained.
However, the following paper choice guidelines will help alleviate the environmental impact of printing:
1Minimize paper consumption.
2Be selective about the origin of wood fiber. Buy from suppliers who carry certifications such as the Forestry
Stewardship Council (FSC) or The Program for the Endorsement of Forest Certification (PEFC). These certifications
guarantee that the paper manufacturer uses wood pulp from forestry operators that employ environmentally and
socially responsible forest management and restoration practices.
3Choose the most appropriate paper for printing needs: normal 75 or 80 g/m2 certified paper, lower weight paper,
or recycled paper.
Unacceptable paper examples
Test results indicate that the following paper types are at risk for use with laser printers:
•Chemically treated papers used to make copies without carbon paper, also known as carbonless papers
•Preprinted papers with chemicals that may contaminate the printer
•Preprinted papers that can be affected by the temperature in the printer fuser
•Preprinted papers that require a registration (the precise location on the page) greater than ± 2.3 mm (± 0.9 in.),
such as optical character recognition (OCR) forms. In some cases, registration can be adjusted with a software
application to successfully print on these forms.)
•Coated papers (erasable bond), synthetic papers, thermal papers
•Rough-edged, rough or heavily textured surface papers or curled papers
•Recycled papers that fail EN12281:2002 (European testing)
•Paper weighing less than 60 g/m2 (16 lb)
•Multiple part forms or documents
For more information about Lexmark, visit www.lexmark.com. General sustainability-related information can be found
at the Environmental Sustainability link.
Storing paper
Use these paper storage guidelines to help avoid jams and uneven print quality:
•For best results, store paper where the temperature is 21°C (70°F) and the relative humidity is 40 percent. Most
label manufacturers recommend printing in a temperature range of 18–24°C (65–75°F) with relative humidity
between 40 and 60 percent.
•Store paper in cartons, on a pallet or shelf, rather than on the floor.
•Store individual packages on a flat surface.
•Do not store anything on top of individual paper packages.
•Take paper out of the carton or wrapper only when you are ready to load it in the printer. The carton and wrapper
help keep the paper clean, dry, and flat.
Paper and specialty media guide 147
Supported paper sizes, types, and weights
The following tables provide information on standard and optional paper sources and the types of paper they support.
Note: For an unlisted paper size, select the closest larger listed size.
Paper types and weights supported by the printer
The printer engine supports 60–176‑g/m2 (16–47‑lb) paper weights.
Paper type 250‑ or 550‑sheet
trays
2100‑sheet tray Multipurpose feeder Duplex
Paper
Card stock X
Plain Envelope X X
Rough Envelope X X
Paper labels X X
Pharmacy labels X
Transparencies* X X
* Print on transparencies by batches of only up to 20 to prevent them from sticking together. For more information, see
“Tips on using transparencies” on page 144.
Paper sizes supported by the printer
Paper size1Dimensions Standard or
optional 250‑ or
550‑sheet tray
Optional
2100‑sheet tray
Multipurpose
feeder
Duplex
A4 210 x 297 mm
(8.3 x 11.7 in.)
A5 148 x 210 mm
(5.8 x 8.3 in.)
A6 105 x 148 mm
(4.1 x 5.8 in.)
X
JIS B5 182 x 257 mm
(7.2 x 10.1 in.)
X
1 If your preferred default paper size cannot be set in the printer control panel, then you may select common paper sizes
that correspond to the position of the length guide in the tray from the Paper Size/Type menu. If the paper size is not
available, then select Universal or turn off tray size sensing. For more information, contact customer support.
2 Universal is supported in duplex mode only if the width is from 105 mm (4.13 in.) to 216 mm (8.5 in.), and the length is
from 148 mm (5.83 in.) to 356 mm (14 in.)
3 When printing on paper less than 210 mm (8.3 in.) wide, the printer prints at a reduced speed to prevent damage to the
fuser.
Paper and specialty media guide 148
Paper size1Dimensions Standard or
optional 250‑ or
550‑sheet tray
Optional
2100‑sheet tray
Multipurpose
feeder
Duplex
Letter 216 x 279 mm
(8.5 x 11 in.)
Legal 216 x 356 mm
(8.5 x 14 in.)
Executive 184 x 267 mm
(7.3 x 10.5 in.)
X
Oficio 216 x 340 mm
(8.5 x 13.4 in.)
Folio 216 x 330 mm
(8.5 x 13 in.)
Statement 140 x 216 mm
(5.5 x 8.5 in.)
X
Universal2,3 105 x 148 mm to
216 x 356 mm
(4.13 x 5.83 in. to
8.5 x 14 in.)
X
70 x 127 mm to
216 x 356 mm
(2.76 x 5 to
8.5 x 14 in.)
XX X
7 3/4 Envelope
(Monarch)
98 x 191 mm
(3.9 x 7.5 in.)
X X
9 Envelope 98 x 225 mm
(3.9 x 8.9 in.)
X X
10 Envelope 105 x 241 mm
(4.1 x 9.5 in.)
X X
DL Envelope 110 x 220 mm
(4.3 x 8.7 in.)
X X
C5 Envelope 162 x 229 mm
(6.38 x 9.01 in.)
X X
B5 Envelope 176 x 250 mm
(6.93 x 9.84 in.)
X X
1 If your preferred default paper size cannot be set in the printer control panel, then you may select common paper sizes
that correspond to the position of the length guide in the tray from the Paper Size/Type menu. If the paper size is not
available, then select Universal or turn off tray size sensing. For more information, contact customer support.
2 Universal is supported in duplex mode only if the width is from 105 mm (4.13 in.) to 216 mm (8.5 in.), and the length is
from 148 mm (5.83 in.) to 356 mm (14 in.)
3 When printing on paper less than 210 mm (8.3 in.) wide, the printer prints at a reduced speed to prevent damage to the
fuser.
Paper and specialty media guide 149
Paper size1Dimensions Standard or
optional 250‑ or
550‑sheet tray
Optional
2100‑sheet tray
Multipurpose
feeder
Duplex
Other Envelope 98 x 162 mm
(3.9 x 6.4 in.) to
176 x 250 mm
(6.9 x 9.8 in.)
X X
1 If your preferred default paper size cannot be set in the printer control panel, then you may select common paper sizes
that correspond to the position of the length guide in the tray from the Paper Size/Type menu. If the paper size is not
available, then select Universal or turn off tray size sensing. For more information, contact customer support.
2 Universal is supported in duplex mode only if the width is from 105 mm (4.13 in.) to 216 mm (8.5 in.), and the length is
from 148 mm (5.83 in.) to 356 mm (14 in.)
3 When printing on paper less than 210 mm (8.3 in.) wide, the printer prints at a reduced speed to prevent damage to the
fuser.
Paper sizes, types, and weights supported by the finishers
Supported paper sizes
Paper size 4‑bin mailbox Output expander and
high‑capacity output
expander
Staple finisher Staple, hole punch
finisher
A6 XX
A5 2X
JIS B5 XX
Executive XX
Letter
A4
Legal 3
Folio
Oficio
Statement 1 1
Universal 3 3
Envelopes XXX
1 The finisher stacks the paper but does not staple or punch holes in it.
2 The finisher staples the paper if it is loaded short edge first.
3 The finisher staples the paper if its width is between 8.27 and 8.54 inches but does not punch holes in it.
Paper and specialty media guide 150
Supported paper types and weights
Paper type Paper weight 4‑bin mailbox Output expander
and high‑capacity
output expander
Staple finisher Staple, hole punch
finisher
Plain Paper 90–176 g/m2
(24–47 lb) XXX
60–90 g/m2
(16–24 lb)
Card Stock 163 g/m2
(90 Ib) X 1 1
199 g/m2
(110 Ib) XXX
Transparency2146 g/m2
(39 Ib) X 1 1
Recycled 90–176 g/m2
(24–47 lb) XXX
60–90 g/m2
(16–24 lb)
Paper labels 180 g/m2
(48 Ib) XXX
Dual web and
Integrated
180 g/m2
(48 Ib) XXX
Bond 90–176 g/m2
(24–47 lb) XXX
60–90 g/m2
(16–24 lb)
Envelope 105 g/m2
(28 Ib) XXX
Letterhead 90–176 g/m2
(24–47 lb) XXX
60–90 g/m2
(16–24 lb)
Preprinted 90–176 g/m2
(24–47 lb) XXX
60–90 g/m2
(16–24 lb)
1 The finisher stacks the paper but does not staple or punch holes in it.
2 Print on transparencies by batches of only up to 20 to prevent them from sticking together. For more information, see
“Tips on using transparencies” on page 144.
Paper and specialty media guide 151
Paper type Paper weight 4‑bin mailbox Output expander
and high‑capacity
output expander
Staple finisher Staple, hole punch
finisher
Colored Paper 90–176 g/m2
(24–47 lb) XXX
60–90 g/m2
(16–24 lb)
1 The finisher stacks the paper but does not staple or punch holes in it.
2 Print on transparencies by batches of only up to 20 to prevent them from sticking together. For more information, see
“Tips on using transparencies” on page 144.
Paper and specialty media guide 152
Understanding the printer menus
Menus list
Paper Menu Reports Network/Ports
Default Source
Paper Size/Type
Configure MP
Substitute Size
Paper Texture
Paper Weight
Paper Loading
Custom Types
Custom Names
Custom Bin Names
Universal Setup
Bin Setup
Menu Settings Page
Device Statistics
Stapler Test
Network Setup Page 1
Profiles List
Print Fonts
Print Directory
Asset Report
Active NIC
Standard Network 2
Standard USB
Parallel [x]
Serial [x]
SMTP Setup
Security Settings Help
Edit Security Setups 3
Miscellaneous Security Settings
Confidential Print
Disk Wiping
Security Audit Log
Set Date and Time
General Settings
Flash Drive Menu
Print Settings
Print All Guides
Print Quality
Printing Guide
Media Guide
Print Defects Guide
Menu Map
Information Guide
Connection Guide
Moving Guide
Supplies Guide
1 Depending on the printer setup, this menu item appears as Network Setup Page or Network [x] Setup Page.
2 Depending on the printer setup, this menu item appears as Standard Network or Network [x].
3 This menu appears only in select touch‑screen printer models.
Understanding the printer menus 153
Paper menu
Default Source menu
Use To
Default Source
Tray [x]
Multipurpose Feeder
Manual Paper
Manual Envelope
Set a default paper source for all print jobs.
Notes:
•Tray 1 (standard tray) is the factory default setting.
•From the Paper menu, set Configure MP to "Cassette" for Multipurpose
Feeder to appear as a menu setting.
•If two trays contain paper of the same size and type, and the trays have
the same settings, then the trays are automatically linked. When one tray
is empty, the print job continues using the linked tray.
Paper Size/Type menu
Use To
Tray [x] Size
A4
A5
A6
JIS‑B5
Letter
Legal
Executive
Oficio (Mexico)
Folio
Statement
Universal
7 3/4 Envelope
9 Envelope
10 Envelope
DL Envelope
C5 Envelope
B5 Envelope
Other Envelope
Specify the paper size loaded in each tray.
Notes:
•Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.
•If two trays contain paper of the same size and type, and the trays have
the same settings, then the trays are automatically linked. The
multipurpose feeder may also be linked. When one tray is empty, the
print job continues using the linked tray.
•The A6 paper size is supported only in Tray 1 and the multipurpose
feeder.
Note: Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu.
Understanding the printer menus 154
Use To
Tray [x] Type
Plain Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Recycled
Labels
Vinyl Labels
Bond
Envelope
Rough Envelope
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Light Paper
Heavy Paper
Rough/Cotton
Custom Type [x]
Specify the type of paper loaded in each tray.
Notes:
•Plain Paper is the factory default setting for Tray 1. Custom Type [x] is
the factory default setting for all other trays.
•If available, a user‑defined name will appear instead of Custom Type [x].
•Use this menu to configure automatic tray linking.
MP Feeder Size
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Letter
Legal
Executive
Oficio (Mexico)
Folio
Statement
Universal
7 3/4 Envelope
9 Envelope
10 Envelope
DL Envelope
C5 Envelope
B5 Envelope
Other Envelope
Specify the paper size loaded in the multipurpose feeder.
Notes:
•Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.
•From the Paper menu, set Configure MP to “Cassette” for MP Feeder
Size to appear as a menu.
•The multipurpose feeder does not automatically detect paper size.
Make sure to set the paper size value.
Note: Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu.
Understanding the printer menus 155
Use To
MP Feeder Type
Plain Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Recycled
Labels
Vinyl Labels
Bond
Envelope
Rough Envelope
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Light Paper
Heavy Paper
Rough/Cotton
Custom Type [x]
Specify the paper type loaded in the multipurpose feeder.
Notes:
•Plain Paper is the factory default setting.
•From the Paper menu, set Configure to “Cassette” for MP Feeder Type
to appear as a menu.
Manual Paper Size
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Letter
Legal
Executive
Oficio (Mexico)
Folio
Statement
Universal
Specify the size of the paper being manually loaded.
Note: Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.
Note: Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu.
Understanding the printer menus 156
Use To
Manual Paper Type
Plain Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Recycled
Labels
Vinyl Labels
Bond
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Light Paper
Heavy Paper
Rough/Cotton
Custom Type [x]
Specify the paper type being manually loaded.
Notes:
•Plain Paper is the factory default setting.
•From the Paper menu, set Configure MP to “Manual” for Manual Paper
Type to appear as a menu.
Manual Envelope Size
7 3/4 Envelope
9 Envelope
10 Envelope
DL Envelope
C5 Envelope
B5 Envelope
Other Envelope
Specify the envelope size being manually loaded.
Note: 10 Envelope is the US factory default setting. DL Envelope is the
international factory default setting.
Manual Envelope Type
Envelope
Rough Envelope
Custom Type [x]
Specify the envelope type being manually loaded.
Note: Envelope is the factory default setting.
Note: Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu.
Configure MP menu
Use To
Configure MP
Cassette
Manual
First
Determine when the printer selects paper from the multipurpose feeder.
Notes:
•Cassette is the factory default setting. Cassette configures the
multipurpose feeder as the automatic paper source.
•Manual sets the multipurpose feeder only for manual‑feed print jobs.
•First configures the multipurpose feeder as the primary paper source.
Understanding the printer menus 157
Substitute Size menu
Use To
Substitute Size
Off
Statement/A5
Letter/A4
All Listed
Substitute a specified paper size if the requested paper size is not available.
Notes:
•All Listed is the factory default setting. All available substitutions are
allowed.
•Off indicates that no size substitutions are allowed.
•Setting a size substitution lets the print job continue without Change
Paper appearing.
Paper Texture menu
Use To
Plain Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the plain paper loaded in a specific tray.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Card Stock Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the card stock loaded in a specific tray.
Notes:
•Normal is the factory default setting.
•These options appear only if card stock is supported.
Transparency Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the transparencies loaded in a specific tray.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Recycled Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the recycled paper loaded in a specific tray.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Labels Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the labels loaded in a specific tray.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Vinyl Labels Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the vinyl labels loaded in a specific tray.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Bond Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the bond paper loaded in a specific tray.
Note: Rough is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 158
Use To
Envelope Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the envelopes loaded in a specific tray.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Rough Envelope Texture
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the rough envelopes loaded in a specific tray.
Note: Rough is the factory default setting.
Letterhead Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the letterhead loaded in a specific tray.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Preprinted Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the preprinted paper loaded in a specific tray.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Colored Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the colored paper loaded in a specific tray.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Light Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the light paper loaded in a specific tray.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Heavy Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the heavy paper loaded in a specific tray.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Rough/Cotton Texture
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the rough or cotton paper loaded in a specific tray.
Note: Rough is the factory default setting.
Custom [x] Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the custom paper loaded in a specific tray.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Paper Weight menu
Use To
Plain Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the plain paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 159
Use To
Card Stock Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the card stock loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Transparency Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the transparencies loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Recycled Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the recycled paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Labels Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the labels loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Vinyl Labels Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the vinyl labels loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Bond Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the bond paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Envelope Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the envelope loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Rough Envelope Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the rough envelope loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Letterhead Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the letterhead loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Preprinted Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the preprinted paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 160
Use To
Colored Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the colored paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Light Weight
Light
Specify that the weight of the paper loaded is light.
Heavy Weight
Heavy
Specify that the weight of the paper loaded is heavy.
Rough/Cotton Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the cotton or rough paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Custom [x] Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the custom paper loaded.
Notes:
•Normal is the factory default setting.
•The options appear only when the custom type is supported.
Paper Loading menu
Use To
Card Stock Loading
Duplex
Off
Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Card Stock
as the paper type.
Recycled Loading
Duplex
Off
Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Recycled
as the paper type.
Labels Loading
Duplex
Off
Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Labels as
the paper type.
Vinyl Labels Loading
Duplex
Off
Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Vinyl
Labels as the paper type.
Bond Loading
Duplex
Off
Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Bond as
the paper type.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting for all Paper Loading menu selections.
•Duplex sets the printer default to two‑sided printing for every print job unless one‑sided printing is selected from
Print Properties or the print dialog, depending on your operating system.
Understanding the printer menus 161
Use To
Letterhead Loading
Duplex
Off
Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Letterhead
as the paper type.
Preprinted Loading
Duplex
Off
Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Preprinted
as the paper type.
Colored Loading
Duplex
Off
Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Colored
as the paper type.
Light Loading
Duplex
Off
Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Light as
the paper type.
Heavy Loading
Duplex
Off
Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Heavy as
the paper type.
Rough/Cotton Loading
Duplex
Off
Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Rough or
Cotton as the paper type.
Custom [x] Loading
Duplex
Off
Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Custom [x]
as the paper type.
Note: Custom [x] Loading is available only when the custom type is
supported.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting for all Paper Loading menu selections.
•Duplex sets the printer default to two‑sided printing for every print job unless one‑sided printing is selected from
Print Properties or the print dialog, depending on your operating system.
Custom Types menu
Use To
Custom Type [x]
Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Rough/Cotton
Labels
Vinyl Labels
Envelope
Associate a paper or specialty media type with a factory default custom type
name or a user‑defined custom name created from the Embedded Web Server
or from MarkVisionTM Professional.
Notes:
•Paper is the factory default setting.
•The custom media type must be supported by the selected tray or
multipurpose feeder in order to print from that source.
Understanding the printer menus 162
Use To
Recycled
Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Rough/Cotton
Labels
Vinyl Labels
Envelope
Specify a paper type when Recycled is selected in other menus.
Notes:
•Paper is the factory default setting.
•The custom media type must be supported by the selected tray or
multipurpose feeder in order to print from that source.
Custom Names menu
Use To
Custom Name [x] Specify a custom name for a paper type. This name replaces Custom Type [x] in
the printer menus.
Custom Bin Names menu
Use To
Standard Bin Specify a custom name for the standard bin.
Bin [x] Specify a custom name for Bin [x].
Universal Setup menu
Use To
Units of Measure
Inches
Millimeters
Identify the units of measure.
Notes:
•Inches is the US factory default setting.
•Millimeters is the international factory default setting.
Portrait Width
3–8.5 inches
76–216 mm
Set the portrait width.
Notes:
•If the width exceeds the maximum, then the printer uses the
maximum width allowed.
•8.5 inches is the US factory default setting. You can increase the
width in 0.01‑inch increments.
•216 mm is the international factory default setting. You can increase
the width in 1‑mm increments.
Understanding the printer menus 163
Use To
Portrait Height
3–14.17 inches
76–360 mm
Set the portrait height.
Notes:
•If the height exceeds the maximum, then the printer uses the
maximum height allowed.
•14 inches is the US factory default setting. You can increase the
height in 0.01‑inch increments.
•356 mm is the international factory default setting. You can increase
the height in 1‑mm increments.
Feed Direction
Short Edge
Long Edge
Specify the feed direction if the paper can be loaded in either direction.
Notes:
•Short Edge is the factory default setting.
•Long Edge appears only when the longest edge is shorter than the
maximum width supported in the tray.
Bin Setup menu
Use To
Output Bin
Standard Bin
Bin [x]
Specify the default bin.
Notes:
•If multiple bins are assigned the same name, then the
name appears only once in the menu.
•Standard Bin is the factory default setting.
Configure Bins
Mailbox
Link
Mail Overflow
Link Optional
Type Assignment
Specify configuration options for bins.
Notes:
•Mailbox is the factory default setting. This setting
treats each bin as a separate mailbox.
•Link configures all available bins as one large bin.
•Mail Overflow configures each bin as a separate
mailbox.
•Link Optional links all available bins except the
standard bin and only appears when at least two
optional bins are installed.
•Type Assignment assigns each paper type to a bin or
linked bin set.
•Bins assigned the same name are automatically
linked unless Link Optional is selected.
Understanding the printer menus 164
Use To
Overflow Bin
Standard Bin
Bin [x]
Specify an alternative bin when a designated bin is full.
Notes:
•Standard Bin is the factory default setting.
•If multiple bins are assigned the same name, then the
name only appears once in the bin list.
•[x] can be any number between 1 and 12 if the
appropriate optional bins are installed.
Assign Type/Bin
Plain Paper Bin
Card Stock Bin
Transparency Bin
Recycled Bin
Labels Bin
Vinyl Labels Bin
Bond Bin
Envelope Bin
Rough Envelope Bin
Letterhead Bin
Preprinted Bin
Colored Bin
Light Paper Bin
Heavy Paper Bin
Rough/Cotton Bin
Custom [x] Bin
Select a bin for each supported paper type.
For each type, select the following options:
Disabled
Standard Bin
Bin [x]
Notes:
•Disabled is the factory default setting.
•[x] can be any number between 1 and 12 if the
appropriate optional bins are installed.
•If multiple bins are assigned the same name, then the
name only appears once in the bin list.
Reports menu
Reports menu
Use To
Menu Settings Page Print a report containing information about the paper loaded in trays, installed
memory, total page count, alarms, timeouts, printer control panel language,
TCP/IP address, status of supplies, status of the network connection, and other
information.
Device Statistics Print a report containing printer statistics such as supply information and details
about printed pages.
Stapler Test Print a report that confirms that the staple finisher is functioning properly.
Note: This menu appears only if an optional staple finisher is installed.
Network Setup Page Print a report containing information about the network printer settings, such as
the TCP/IP address information.
Note: This menu item appears only in network printers or in printers connected
to print servers.
Understanding the printer menus 165
Use To
Network [x] Setup Page Print a report containing information about the network printer settings, such as
the TCP/IP address information.
Notes:
•This menu item is available only when more than one network option is
installed.
•This menu item appears only in network printers or in printers connected
to print servers.
Profiles List Print a list of profiles stored in the printer.
Note: This menu item appears only when LDSS is enabled.
Print Fonts
PCL Fonts
PostScript Fonts
Print a report of all the fonts available for the printer language currently set in
the printer.
Note: A separate list is available for PCL and PostScript emulations.
Print Directory Print a list of all the resources stored in an optional flash memory card or printer
hard disk.
Notes:
•Job Buffer Size must be set to 100%.
•Make sure the optional flash memory or printer hard disk is installed
correctly and working properly.
•This menu item appears only when an optional flash drive or printer hard
disk is installed.
Asset Report Print a report containing printer asset information, such as serial number and
model name.
Network/Ports menu
Active NIC menu
Use To
Active NIC
Auto
[list of available network cards]
Allow the printer to connect to a network.
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting.
•This menu item appears only if an optional network adapter is installed.
Standard Network or Network [x] menu
Note: Only active ports appear in this menu. All inactive ports are omitted.
Understanding the printer menus 166
Use To
PCL SmartSwitch
On
Off
Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job requires
it, regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•If PCL SmartSwitch is disabled, then the printer does not examine incoming
data and it uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu.
PS SmartSwitch
On
Off
Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job requires it,
regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•If PS SmartSwitch is disabled, then the printer does not examine incoming
data and it uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu.
NPA Mode
Off
Auto
Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol.
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting.
•Changing this setting from the printer control panel, and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Network Buffer
Auto
3KB to [maximum size allowed]
Set the size of the network input buffer.
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting.
•The value can be changed in 1KB increments.
•The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer,
the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or
Off.
•To increase the maximum size range for the Network Buffer, disable or
reduce the size of the parallel, serial, and USB buffers.
•Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Job Buffering
Off
On
Auto
Temporarily store print jobs in the printer hard disk before printing. This menu only
appears when a formatted disk is installed.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•On buffers print jobs on the printer hard disk.
•Auto buffers print jobs only when the printer is busy processing data from
another input port.
•Changing this setting from the printer control panel, and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Understanding the printer menus 167
Use To
Mac Binary PS
On
Off
Auto
Set the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs.
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting.
•Off filters print jobs using the standard protocol.
•On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.
Standard Network Setup OR
Network [x] Setup
Reports
Network Card
TCP/IP
IPv6
Wireless
AppleTalk
Show and set the printer network settings.
Note: The Wireless menu appears only when the printer is connected to a wireless
network.
Reports menu
To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:
•Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > Reports
•Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Reports
Use To
Print Setup Page Print a report containing information about the network printer settings, such as the TCP/IP address.
Network Card menu
To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:
•Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > Network Card
•Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Network Card
Use To
View Card Status
Connected
Disconnected
View the connection status of the wireless network adapter.
View Card Speed View the speed of an active wireless network adapter.
Network Address
UAA
LAA
View the network addresses.
Understanding the printer menus 168
Use To
Job Timeout
0, 10–225 seconds
Set the amount of time it takes for a network print job to be canceled.
Notes:
•“90 seconds” is the factory default setting.
•A setting value of 0 disables the timeout.
•If a value between 1 and 9 is selected, then Invalid appears on the
display, and the value is not saved.
Banner Page
Off
On
Allow the printer to print a banner page.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
TCP/IP menu
To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:
•Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > TCP/IP
•Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > TCP/IP
Note: This menu is available only in network printers or printers attached to print servers.
Use To
Set Hostname Set the current TCP/IP host name.
Note: This can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server.
IP Address View or change the current TCP/IP address.
Note: Manually setting the IP address sets the Enable DHCP and Enable Auto IP
settings to Off. It also sets Enable BOOTP and Enable RARP to Off on systems that
support BOOTP and RARP.
Netmask View or change the current TCP/IP netmask.
Gateway View or change the current TCP/IP gateway.
Enable DHCP
On
Off
Specify the DHCP address and parameter assignment.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Enable RARP
On
Off
Specify the RARP address assignment setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Enable BOOTP
On
Off
Specify the BOOTP address assignment setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Enable AutoIP
Yes
No
Specify the Zero Configuration Networking setting.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Enable FTP/TFTP
Yes
No
Enable the built-in FTP server, which lets you send files to the printer using File Transfer
Protocol.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 169
Use To
Enable HTTP Server
Yes
No
Enable the built-in Web server (Embedded Web Server). When enabled, the printer
can be monitored and managed remotely using a Web browser.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
WINS Server Address View or change the current WINS server address.
Enable DDNS
Yes
No
View or change the current DDNS setting.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Enable mDNS
Yes
No
View or change the current mDNS setting.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
DNS Server Address View or change the current DNS server address.
Backup DNS Server Address View or change the backup DNS server addresses.
Backup DNS Server Address 2
Backup DNS Server Address 3
Enable HTTPS
Yes
No
View or change the current HTTPS setting.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
IPv6 menu
To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:
•Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > IPv6
•Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > IPv6
Note: This menu is available only in network printers or printers that are attached to print servers.
Use To
Enable IPv6
On
Off
Enable IPv6 in the printer.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Auto Configuration
On
Off
Specify whether or not the wireless network adapter accepts the
automatic IPv6 address configuration entries provided by a router.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
View Hostname Set the host name.
Note: These settings can be changed only from the Embedded Web
Server.
View Address
View Router Address
Enable DHCPv6
On
Off
Enable DHCPv6 in the printer.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 170
Wireless menu
Note: This menu is available only in printers connected to a wireless network or printer models that have a wireless
network adapter.
To access the menu, navigate to:
Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Wireless
Use To
Wi‑Fi Protected Setup
Start Push Button Method
Start PIN Method
Establish a wireless network and enable network security.
Notes:
•Start Push Button Method connects the printer to a wireless
network when buttons on both the printer and the access point
(wireless router) are pressed within a given period of time.
•Start PIN Method connects the printer to a wireless network when
a PIN on the printer is entered into the wireless settings of the
access point.
Enable/Disable WPS Auto‑detection
Enable
Disable
Automatically detect the connection method that an access point with
WPS uses—Start Push Button Method or Start PIN Method.
Note: Disable is the factory default setting.
Network Mode
BSS Type
Infrastructure
Ad hoc
Specify the network mode.
Notes:
•Infrastructure is the factory default setting. This lets the printer
access a network using an access point.
•Ad hoc configures wireless connection directly between the printer
and a computer.
Compatibility
802.11b/g
802.11b/g/n
Specify the wireless standard for the wireless network.
Note: 802.11b/g/n is the factory default setting.
Choose Network Select an available network for the printer to use.
View Signal Quality View the quality of the wireless connection.
View Security Mode View the encryption method for the wireless network.
AppleTalk menu
Note: This menu appears only in printer models that are connected to an Ethernet network or when an optional
wireless network adapter is installed.
To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:
•Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > AppleTalk
•Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > AppleTalk
Understanding the printer menus 171
Use To
Activate
Yes
No
Enable or disable AppleTalk support.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
View Name Show the assigned AppleTalk name.
Note: The AppleTalk name can be changed only from the Embedded Web
Server.
View Address Show the assigned AppleTalk address.
Note: The AppleTalk address can be changed only from the Embedded Web
Server.
Set Zone
[list of zones available on the network]
Provide a list of AppleTalk zones available on the network.
Note: The default zone for the network is the factory default setting.
Standard USB menu
Use To
PCL SmartSwitch
On
Off
Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received
through a USB port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses
PostScript emulation if the PS SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default
printer language specified in the Setup menu if the PS SmartSwitch is set to
Off.
PS SmartSwitch
On
Off
Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received
through a USB port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses
PCL emulation if the PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer
language specified in the Setup menu if the PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.
NPA Mode
On
Off
Auto
Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol.
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting. Auto sets the printer to examine data,
determine the format, and then process it appropriately.
•The printer automatically restarts when changing the setting from the printer
control panel. The menu selection is then updated.
Understanding the printer menus 172
Use To
USB Buffer
Disabled
Auto
3K to [maximum size allowed]
Set the size of the USB input buffer.
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting.
•Disabled turns off job buffering. Any jobs already buffered on the printer hard
disk are printed before normal processing resumes.
•The USB buffer size value can be changed in 1-K increments.
•The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer,
the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or
Off.
•To increase the maximum size range for the USB Buffer, disable or reduce the
size of the parallel, serial, and network buffers.
•The printer automatically restarts when the setting is changed from the printer
control panel. The menu selection is then updated.
Job Buffering
Off
On
Auto
Temporarily store print jobs in the printer hard disk before printing.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•On buffers jobs on the printer hard disk.
•Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another
input port.
•Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Mac Binary PS
On
Off
Auto
Set the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs.
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting.
•On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.
•Off filters print jobs using the standard protocol.
ENA Address
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
Set the network address information for an external print server.
Note: This menu is available only when the printer is attached to an external print
server through the USB port.
ENA Netmask
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
Set the netmask information for an external print server.
Note: This menu is available only when the printer is attached to an external print
server through the USB port.
ENA Gateway
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
Set the gateway information for an external print server.
Note: This menu is available only when the printer is attached to an external print
server through the USB port.
Parallel [x] menu
Note: This menu appears only when an optional parallel card is installed.
Understanding the printer menus 173
Use To
PCL SmartSwitch
On
Off
Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received
through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses
PostScript emulation if PS SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer
language specified in the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off.
PS SmartSwitch
On
Off
Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received
through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses
PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer
language specified in the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.
NPA Mode
On
Off
Auto
Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol.
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting.
•Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Parallel Buffer
Disabled
Auto
3K to [maximum size allowed]
Set the size of the parallel input buffer.
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting.
•Disabled turns off job buffering. Any print jobs already buffered on the printer
hard disk are printed before normal processing resumes.
•The parallel buffer size setting can be changed in 1‑KB increments.
•The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer,
the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or
Off.
•To increase the maximum size range for the Parallel Buffer, disable or reduce
the size of the USB, serial, and network buffers.
•Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Job Buffering
Off
On
Auto
Temporarily store print jobs on the printer hard disk before printing.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•On buffers print jobs on the printer hard disk.
•Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another
input port.
•Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Understanding the printer menus 174
Use To
Advanced Status
On
Off
Enable bidirectional communication through the parallel port.
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•Off disables parallel port negotiation.
Protocol
Standard
Fastbytes
Specify the parallel port protocol.
Notes:
•Fastbytes is the factory default setting. It provides compatibility with most
existing parallel ports and is the recommended setting.
•Standard tries to resolve parallel port communication problems.
Honor Init
On
Off
Determine if the printer honors printer hardware initialization requests from the
computer.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•The computer requests initialization by activating the Init signal from the
parallel port. Many personal computers activate the Init signal each time the
computer is turned on.
Parallel Mode 2
On
Off
Determine if the parallel port data is sampled on the leading or trailing edge of a
strobe.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Mac Binary PS
On
Off
Auto
Set the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs.
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting.
•Off filters print jobs using the standard protocol.
•On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.
ENA Address
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
Set the network address information for an external print server.
Note: This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print
server through the USB port.
ENA Netmask
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
Set the netmask information for an external print server.
Note: This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print
server through the USB port.
ENA Gateway
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
Set the gateway information for an external print server.
Note: This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print
server through the USB port.
Serial [x] menu
Note: This menu appears only when an optional serial card is installed.
Understanding the printer menus 175
Use To
PCL SmartSwitch
On
Off
Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received
through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses
PostScript emulation if PS SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer
language specified in the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off.
PS SmartSwitch
On
Off
Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received
through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses
PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer
language specified in the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.
NPA Mode
On
Off
Auto
Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol.
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting. Auto sets the printer to examine data,
determine the format, and then processes it appropriately.
•When set to On, the printer performs NPA processing. If the data is not in NPA
format, it is rejected as bad data.
•When set to Off, the printer does not perform NPA processing.
•Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Serial Buffer
Disabled
Auto
3K to [maximum size allowed]
Set the size of the serial input buffer.
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting.
•Disabled turns off job buffering. Any jobs already buffered on the disk are
printed before normal processing is resumed.
•The serial buffer size setting can be changed in 1‑KB increments.
•The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer,
the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or
Off.
•To increase the maximum size range for the Serial Buffer, disable or reduce
the size of the parallel, serial, and network buffers.
•Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Understanding the printer menus 176
Use To
Job Buffering
Off
On
Auto
Temporarily store print jobs on the printer hard disk before printing.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting. The printer does not buffer print jobs on the
printer hard disk.
•On buffers print jobs on the printer hard disk.
•Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another
input port.
•Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Protocol
DTR
DTR/DSR
XON/XOFF
XON/XOFF/DTR
XONXOFF/DTRDSR
Select the hardware and software handshaking settings for the serial port.
Notes:
•DTR is the factory default setting.
•DTR/DSR is a hardware handshaking setting.
•XON/XOFF is a software handshaking setting.
•XON/XOFF/DTR and XON/XOFF/DTR/DSR are combined hardware and
software handshaking settings.
Robust XON
On
Off
Determine whether the printer communicates availability to the computer.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•This menu item applies only to the serial port if Serial Protocol is set to
XON/XOFF.
Baud
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
38400
57600
115200
138200
172800
230400
345600
Specify the rate at which data can be received through the serial port.
Notes:
•9600 is the factory default setting.
•138200, 172800, 230400, and 345600 baud rates are only displayed in the
Standard Serial menu. These settings do not appear in the Serial Option 1,
Serial Option 2, or Serial Option 3 menus.
Data Bits
7
8
Specify the number of data bits sent in each transmission frame.
Note: 8 is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 177
Use To
Parity
Even
Odd
None
Ignore
Set the parity for serial input and output data frames.
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Honor DSR
On
Off
Determine whether the printer uses the DSR Signal.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•DSR is a handshaking signal used by most serial cables. The serial port uses
DSR to distinguish data sent by the computer from data created by electrical
noise in the serial cable. The electrical noise can cause stray characters to
print. Set this to On to prevent stray characters from printing.
SMTP Setup menu
Use To
Primary SMTP Gateway Specify SMTP server gateway and port information.
Note: 25 is the default SMTP gateway port.
Primary SMTP Gateway Port
Secondary SMTP Gateway
Secondary SMTP Gateway Port
SMTP Timeout
5–30
Specify the amount of time in seconds before the server stops trying to
send an e‑mail.
Note: 30 seconds is the factory default setting.
Reply Address Specify a reply address of up to 128 characters in the e-mail sent by the
printer.
Use SSL
Disabled
Negotiate
Required
Set the printer to use SSL for increased security when connecting to the
SMTP server.
Notes:
•Disabled is the factory default setting.
•When the Negotiate setting is used, the SMTP server determines if
SSL will be used.
SMTP Server Authentication
No authentication required
Login/Plain
CRAM‑MD5
Digest‑MD5
NTLM
Kerberos 5
Specify the type of user authentication required for scan‑to e‑mail
privileges.
Note: “No authentication required” is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 178
Use To
Device‑Initiated E‑mail
None
Use Device SMTP Credentials
Specify what credentials will be used when communicating to the SMTP
server. Some SMTP servers require credentials to send an e-mail.
Notes:
•None is the factory default setting for Device‑Initiated E‑mail and
User‑Initiated E‑mail.
•Device Userid and Device Password are used to log in to the SMTP
server when Use Device SMTP Credentials is selected.
User‑Initiated E‑mail*
None
Use Device SMTP Credentials
Use Session User ID & Password
Use Session E‑mail address & Password
Prompt User
Device Userid
Device Password
Kerberos 5 Realm
NTLM Domain
Security menu
Edit Security Setups menu
Note: This menu appears only in select touch‑screen printer models.
Use To
Edit Backup Password
Use Backup Password
•Off
•On
Password
Create a backup password.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting for “Use Backup Password.”
•This menu appears only if a backup password exists.
Edit Building Blocks
Internal Accounts
NTLM
Simple Kerberos Setup
Kerberos Setup
Active Directory
LDAP
LDAP+GSSAPI
Password
PIN
Edit settings for Internal Accounts, NTLM, Simple Kerberos Setup, Kerberos Setup,
Active Directory, LDAP, Password, and PIN.
Edit Security Templates
[list of available templates]
Add or edit a security template.
Understanding the printer menus 179
Use To
Edit Access Controls
Administrative Menus
Function Access
Management
Solutions
Cancel jobs at the Device
Control access to printer menus, firmware updates, held jobs, and other access
points.
Miscellaneous Security Settings menu
Use To
Login Restrictions
Login failures
Failure time frame
Lockout time
Panel Login Timeout
Remote Login Timeout
Limit the number and time frames of failed login attempts from the printer control
panel before all users are locked out.
Notes:
•“Login failures” specifies the number of failed login attempts before users are
locked out. Settings range from 1 to 10. 3 attempts is the factory default
setting.
•“Failure time frame” specifies the time frame during which failed login
attempts can be made before users are locked out. Settings range from 1 to 60
minutes. 5 minutes is the factory default setting.
•“Lockout time” specifies how long users are locked out after exceeding the
login failures limit. Settings range from 1 to 60 minutes. 5 minutes is the
factory default setting. 1 indicates the printer does not impose a lockout time.
•“Panel Login Timeout” specifies how long the printer remains idle on the
Home screen before automatically logging the user off. Settings range from 1
to 900 seconds. 30 seconds is the factory default setting.
•“Remote Login Timeout” specifies how long a remote interface remains idle
before automatically logging the user off. Settings range from 1 to 120
seconds. 10 minutes is the factory default setting.
Security Reset Jumper
No Effect
Access controls=”No Security”
Reset factory security defaults
Change the value of the security settings.
Notes:
•Access controls=”No Security” retains all the security information that the user
has defined. “No Security" is the factory default setting.
•“No Effect” means the reset has no effect on the device security configuration.
•“Reset factory security defaults” deletes all security information that the user
has defined, and assigns the factory default value to each setting in the
Miscellaneous Security Settings section of both the panel and the Embedded
Web Server.
Minimum PIN Length
1–16
Limit the digit length of the PIN.
Note: 4 is the is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 180
Confidential Print menu
Use To
Max Invalid PIN
Off
2–10
Limit the number of times an invalid PIN can be entered.
Notes:
•This menu appears only when a formatted, non-defective printer hard disk is installed.
•Once the limit is reached, the print jobs for that user name and PIN are deleted.
Confidential Job Expiration
Off
1 hour
4 hours
24 hours
1 week
Limit the amount of time a confidential print job stays in the printer before it is deleted.
Notes:
•If the “Confidential Job Expiration” setting is changed while confidential print jobs
reside in the printer RAM or printer hard disk, then the expiration time for those print
jobs does not change to the new default value.
•If the printer is turned off, then all confidential jobs held in the printer RAM are
deleted.
Repeat Job Expiration
Off
1 hour
4 hours
24 hours
1 week
Set a time limit on how long the printer stores print jobs.
Verify Job Expiration
Off
1 hour
4 hours
24 hours
1 week
Set a time limit on how long the printer stores print jobs needing verification.
Reserve Job Expiration
Off
1 hour
4 hours
24 hours
1 week
Set a time limit on how long the printer stores print jobs for printing at a later time.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Disk Wiping menu
Disk Wiping erases only print job data on the printer hard disk that are not currently in use by the file system. All
permanent data on the printer hard disk are preserved, such as downloaded fonts, macros, and held jobs.
Note: This menu appears only when a formatted, non-defective printer hard disk is installed.
Use To
Wiping Mode
Auto
Specify the mode for disk wiping.
Understanding the printer menus 181
Use To
Automatic Method
Single pass
Multiple pass
Mark all disk space used by a previous print job. This method does not permit the file
system to reuse this space until it has been cleared.
Notes:
•“Single pass” is the factory default setting.
•Only automatic wiping enables users to activate disk wiping without having to
turn the printer off for an extended amount of time.
•Highly confidential information should be wiped using only the Multiple pass
method.
Security Audit Log menu
Use To
Export Log Let an authorized user export the audit log.
Notes:
•To export the audit log from the printer control panel, a flash drive must be
attached to the printer.
•The audit log can be downloaded from the Embedded Web Server and saved
on a computer.
Delete Log
Yes
No
Specify whether or not audit logs are deleted.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Configure Log
Enable Audit
Yes
No
Enable Remote Syslog
No
Yes
Remote Syslog Facility
0–23
Severity of events to log
0–7
Specify how and whether or not audit logs are created.
Notes:
•Enable Audit determines if events are recorded in the secure audit log and
remote syslog. No is the factory default setting.
•Enable Remote Syslog determines if logs are sent to a remote server. No is the
factory default setting.
•Remote Syslog Facility determines the value used to send logs to the remote
syslog server. 4 is the factory default setting.
•If the security audit log is activated, then the severity value of each event is
recorded. 4 is the factory default setting.
Set Date/Time menu
Use To
Current Date and Time View the current date and time settings for the printer.
Manually Set Date and Time Enter the date and time.
Note: Date/Time is set in YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS format.
Time Zone Select the time zone.
Note: GMT is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 182
Use To
Automatically Observe DST
On
Off
Set the printer to use the applicable daylight saving time (DST) start and end times
associated with the printer Time Zone setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting and uses the applicable Daylight Saving Time
associated with the Time Zone setting.
Enable NTP
On
Off
Enable Network Time Protocol, which synchronizes the clocks of devices on a
network.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Settings menu
General Settings
General Settings menu
Use To
Display Language
English
Francais
Deutsch
Italiano
Espanol
Dansk
Norsk
Nederlands
Svenska
Portuguese
Suomi
Russian
Polski
Greek
Magyar
Turkce
Cesky
Simplified Chinese
Traditional Chinese
Korean
Japanese
Set the language of the text that appears on the printer display.
Note: Not all languages are available for all printer models.
Show Supply Estimates
Show estimates
Do not show estimates
Display the estimates of the supplies on the printer control panel,
Embedded Web Server, menu settings, and device statistics
reports.
Note: “Show estimates” is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 183
Use To
Eco-Mode
Off
Energy
Energy/Paper
Paper
Minimize the use of energy, paper, or specialty media.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting. Off resets the printer to its
factory default settings.
•Energy minimizes the power used by the printer.
Performance may be affected, but print quality is not.
•Energy/Paper minimizes the use of power and of paper and
specialty media.
•Paper minimizes the amount of paper and specialty media
needed for a print job. Performance may be affected, but
print quality is not.
Quiet Mode
Off
On
Reduce the amount of noise produced by the printer.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting. This setting supports the
performance specifications for your printer.
•On configures the printer to produce as little noise as
possible. This setting is best suited for printing text and line
art.
•Selecting Photo from the printer driver may disable Quiet
mode and provide better print quality and full‑speed
printing.
Run Initial setup
Yes
No
Instruct the printer to run the setup wizard.
Notes:
•Yes is the factory default setting.
•After completing the setup wizard by selecting Done at the
“Country select” screen, the default becomes No.
Understanding the printer menus 184
Use To
Keyboard
Keyboard Type
English
Francais
Francais Canadien
Deutsch
Italiano
Espanol
Greek
Dansk
Norsk
Nederlands
Svenska
Suomi
Portuguese
Russian
Polski
Swiss German
Swiss French
Korean
Magyar
Turkish
Czech
Simplified Chinese
Traditional Chinese
Japanese
Custom Key 1
Custom Key 2
Specify a language and custom key information for the printer
control panel keyboard. The additional tabs enable access to accent
marks and symbols from the keypad on the printer control panel.
Note: “Custom Key 2” appears only in select touch‑screen printer
models.
Paper Sizes
US
Metric
Specify the unit of measurement for paper sizes.
Notes:
•US is the factory default setting.
•The initial setting is determined by your country or region
selection in the initial setup wizard.
Understanding the printer menus 185
Use To
Displayed Information
Left side
Right side
Custom Text [x]
Specify what is displayed on the upper left and right corners of the
home screen.
For the “Left side” and “Right side” options, select from the
following options:
None
IP Address
Hostname
Contact Name
Location
Date/Time
mDNS/DDNS Service Name
Zero Configuration Name
Custom Text [x]
Model Name
Notes:
•IP Address is the factory default setting for Left side.
•Date/Time is the factory default setting for Right side.
Displayed Information (continued)
Black Toner
Customize the displayed information for Black Toner.
Select from the following options:
When to display
Do not display
Display
Message to Display
Default
Alternate
Default
[text entry]
Alternate
[text entry]
Notes:
•“Do not display” is the factory default setting for “When to
display.”
•Default is the factory default setting for “Message to
Display.”
Understanding the printer menus 186
Use To
Displayed Information (continued)
Paper Jam
Load Paper
Service Errors
Customize the displayed information for Paper Jam, Load Paper,
and Service Errors.
Select from the following options:
Display
Yes
No
Message to Display
Default
Alternate
Default
[text entry]
Alternate
[text entry]
Notes:
•No is the factory default setting for “Display.”
•Default is the factory default setting for “Message to
Display.”
Home screen customization
Change Language
Search Held Jobs
Held Jobs
USB Drive
Profiles and Solutions
Bookmarks
Jobs by user
Change the icons and buttons that appear on the printer control
panel.
For each icon or button, select from the following options:
Display
Do not display
Notes:
•Display is the factory default setting for Search Held Jobs,
Held jobs, and USB Drive.
•“Do not display” is the factory default setting for “Change
Language,” “Profiles and Solutions,” “Bookmarks,” and “Jobs
by user.”
Home screen customization
Forms and Favorites
Background and Idle Screen
Eco-Settings
Change the icons and buttons that appear on the printer control
panel.
For each icon or button, select from the following options:
Display
Do not display
Note: Display is the factory default setting.
Date Format
MM‑DD‑YYYY
DD‑MM‑YYYY
YYYY‑MM‑DD
Format the printer date.
Note: “MM-DD-YYYY” is the US factory default setting.
Time Format
12 hour A.M./P.M.
24 hour clock
Format the printer time.
Understanding the printer menus 187
Use To
Screen Brightness
20–100
Specify the brightness of the display.
Note: 100 is the factory default setting.
Output Lighting
Normal/Standby Mode
Off
Dim
Bright
Set the amount of light from the bin.
Notes:
•If Eco-Mode is set to Energy or Energy/Paper, then the
factory default setting is Dim.
•If Eco-Mode is set to Off or set to Paper, then the factory
default setting is Bright.
•This menu appears only when an indicator light is installed
on the bin or when an optional bin with an indicator light is
added.
Audio Feedback
Button Feedback
On
Off
Volume
1–10
Specify whether icons and buttons have audio feedback.
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting for Button Feedback.
•5 is the factory default setting for Volume.
Show Bookmarks
Yes
No
Specify whether bookmarks are displayed from the Held Jobs area.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting. When Yes is selected,
bookmarks appear in the Held Jobs area.
Web Page Refresh Rate
30–300
Specify the number of seconds between Embedded Web Server
refreshes.
Note: 120 is the factory default setting.
Contact Name Specify a contact name for the printer.
Note: The contact name will be stored on the Embedded Web
Server.
Location Specify the location of the printer.
Note: The location will be stored on the Embedded Web Server.
Alarms
Alarm Control
Cartridge Alarm
Staple Alarm
Hole Punch Alarm
Set an alarm to sound when the printer requires user intervention.
For each alarm type, select from the following options:
Off
Single
Continuous
Notes:
•Single is the factory default setting for Alarm Control. Single
sounds three quick beeps.
•Off is the factory default setting for Cartridge Alarm, Staple
Alarm, and Hole Punch Alarm. Off means no alarm will
sound.
•Continuous repeats three beeps every 10 seconds.
Understanding the printer menus 188
Use To
Timeouts
Standby Mode
Disabled
1–240
Specify the number of minutes of inactivity before the printer
enters a lower power state.
Note: 15 is the factory default setting.
Timeouts
Sleep Mode
Disabled
1–120
Set the amount of time the printer waits after a job is printed before
it goes into a reduced power state.
Notes:
•30 is the factory default setting.
•Disabled appears only when Energy Conserve is set to Off.
•Lower settings conserve more energy, but may require
longer warm‑up times.
•Select a high setting if the printer is in constant use. Under
most circumstances, this keeps the printer ready to print
with minimum warm‑up time.
Timeouts
Hibernate Timeout
Disabled
1 hour
2 hours
3 hours
6 hours
1 day
2 days
3 days
1 week
2 weeks
1 month
Set the printer to operate at a low power state.
Notes:
•When the Hibernate Timeout timer expires, the printer uses
Ethernet connection to check the value of “Hibernate
Timeout on Connection.”
•If “Hibernate Timeout on Connection” is set to “Do Not
Hibernate,” then the printer never automatically hibernates.
•If “Hibernate Timeout on Connection” is set to “Hibernate,”
then the printer follows the Hibernate Timeout value, except
when it is set to Disabled.
Hibernate Timeout on Connection
Hibernate
Do Not Hibernate
Set the printer to follow the setting of “Hibernate Timeout” even
when an active Ethernet connection exists.
Notes:
•“Do Not Hibernate” is the factory default setting.
•If “Hibernate Timeout on Connection” is set to “Do Not
Hibernate,” then the printer never automatically hibernates.
•If “Hibernate Timeout on Connection” is set to “Hibernate,”
then the printer follows the value of the “Hibernate
Timeout” setting, except when it is set to Disabled.
Timeouts
Screen Timeout
15–300 sec
Set the amount of time in seconds the printer waits before
returning the display to a ready state.
Note: “30 sec” is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 189
Use To
Timeouts
Prolong Screen Timeout
Off
On
Set the printer to continue the specified job without returning to
the home screen when the Screen Timeout timer expires.
Notes:
•On allows the user to reset the Screen Timeout timer instead
of returning to ready state.
•Off follows the normal Screen Timeout value.
•Off is the factory default setting.
Timeouts
Print Timeout
Disabled
1–255 sec
Set the amount of time in seconds the printer waits to receive an
end‑of‑job message before canceling the remainder of the print
job.
Notes:
•“90 sec” is the factory default setting.
•When the timer expires, any partially printed page still in the
printer is printed, and then the printer checks to see if any
new print jobs are waiting.
•Print Timeout is available only when using PCL emulation.
This setting has no effect on PostScript emulation print jobs.
Timeouts
Wait Timeout
Disabled
15–65535 sec
Set the amount of time in seconds the printer waits for additional
data before canceling a print job.
Notes:
•“40 sec” is the factory default setting.
•Wait Timeout is available only when the printer is using
PostScript emulation. This setting has no effect on PCL
emulation print jobs.
Timeouts
Job Hold Timeout
5–255 sec
Set the amount of time the printer waits for user intervention
before it holds jobs that require unavailable resources and
continues to print other jobs in the print queue.
Notes:
•“30 sec” is the factory default setting.
•This menu appears only when a printer hard disk is installed.
Error Recovery
Auto Reboot
Reboot when idle
Reboot always
Reboot never
Max Auto Reboots
1–20
Set the printer to restart when an error is encountered.
Notes:
•“Reboot always” is the factory default setting for Auto
Reboot.
•5 is the factory default setting for Max Auto Reboots.
•If the printer performs the same number of automatic
reboots that is set in the printer within a certain amount of
time, then the printer shows the applicable error instead of
restarting.
Understanding the printer menus 190
Use To
Print Recovery
Auto Continue
Disabled
5–255
Let the printer automatically continue printing from certain offline
situations when these are not resolved within the specified time
period.
Note: Disabled is the factory default setting.
Print Recovery
Jam Recovery
On
Off
Auto
Specify whether the printer reprints jammed pages.
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting. The printer reprints
jammed pages unless the memory required to hold the
pages is needed for other printer tasks.
•On sets the printer to always reprint jammed pages.
•Off sets the printer to never reprint jammed pages.
Print Recovery
Jam Assist
On
Off
Set the printer to check for jammed paper automatically.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Print Recovery
Page Protect
Off
On
Let the printer successfully print a page that may not have printed
otherwise.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting. Off prints a partial page
when there is not enough memory to print the whole page.
•On sets the printer to process the whole page so that the
entire page prints.
Press Sleep Button
Do nothing
Sleep
Hibernate
Determine how the printer, while in idle state, reacts to a short
press of the Sleep button.
Note: Sleep is the factory default setting.
Press and Hold Sleep Button
Do nothing
Sleep
Hibernate
Determine how the printer, while in idle state, reacts when you
press and hold the Sleep button.
Note: “Do nothing” is the factory default setting.
Factory Defaults
Do Not Restore
Restore Now
Restore the printer settings to the factory default settings.
Notes:
•Do Not Restore is the factory default setting. Do Not Restore
keeps the user‑defined settings.
•Restore Now returns all printer settings to the factory
default settings except Network/Ports menu settings. All
downloads stored in the RAM are deleted. Downloads stored
in the flash memory or in the printer hard disk are not
affected.
Export Configuration Package
Export
Export the printer configuration package to a flash drive.
Note: The configuration package cannot be exported unless a
flash drive is attached to the printer.
Understanding the printer menus 191
Flash Drive Menu
Print Settings menu
Use To
Copies
1–999
Specify a default number of copies for each print job.
Note: 1 is the factory default setting.
Paper Source
Tray [x]
MP Feeder
Manual Paper
Manual Envelope
Set a default paper source for all print jobs.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Collate
(1,1,1) (2,2,2)
(1,2,3) (1,2,3)
Stack the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies.
Note: “(1,1,1) (2,2,2)” is the factory default setting.
Sides (Duplex)
1 sided
2 sided
Specify whether prints are on one side or on both sides of the page.
Note: 1 sided is the factory default setting.
Staple
Off
On
Specify whether prints are stapled.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•On allows the printer to staple print jobs.
•This menu appears only when a supported staple finisher is installed.
Hole Punch
Off
On
Specify whether prints have holes for binding.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•This menu appears only when a supported staple, hole punch finisher is
installed.
Hole Punch Mode
2 holes
3 holes
4 holes
Specify the number of holes to be made on the prints.
Notes:
•“3 holes” is the factory default setting.
•This menu appears only when a supported staple, hole punch finisher is
installed.
Duplex Binding
Long Edge
Short Edge
Define the way duplexed pages are bound and printed.
Notes:
•Long Edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for
portrait and top edge for landscape). This is the factory default setting.
•Short Edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for
portrait and left edge for landscape).
Understanding the printer menus 192
Use To
Paper Saver Orientation
Auto
Landscape
Portrait
Specify the orientation of a multiple‑page document.
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting.
•This setting affects jobs if the value of the Paper Saver setting in the same
menu is not set to Off.
Paper Saver
Off
2‑Up
3‑Up
4‑Up
6‑Up
9‑Up
12‑Up
16‑Up
Specify that multiple‑page images be printed on one side of a paper.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•The number selected is the number of page images that will print per side.
Paper Saver Border
None
Solid
Print a border on each page image when using N‑Up (pages per side).
Notes:
•None is the factory default setting.
•This setting affects jobs if the value of the Paper Saver setting in the same
menu is not set to Off.
Paper Saver Ordering
Horizontal
Reverse Horizontal
Reverse Vertical
Vertical
Specify the positioning of multiple‑page images when using N‑Up (pages per side).
Notes:
•Horizontal is the factory default setting.
•Positioning depends on the number of page images and whether they are in
portrait or landscape orientation.
•This setting affects jobs if the value of the Paper Saver setting in the same
menu is not set to Off.
Separator Sheets
Off
Between Copies
Between Jobs
Between Pages
Specify if blank separator sheets are inserted.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a print job if
Collate is set to On. If Collate is set to Off, then a blank page is inserted
between each set of printed pages, such as after all page 1's and after all page
2's.
•Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs.
•Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of the print job. This
setting is useful when printing on transparencies or when inserting blank pages
in a document for notes.
Separator Sheet Source
Tray [x]
Manual Feeder
Specify the paper source for separator sheets.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 193
Use To
Blank Pages
Do Not Print
Print
Specify if blank pages are inserted in a print job.
Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.
Print Settings
Setup menu
Use To
Printer Language
PCL Emulation
PS Emulation
Set the default printer language.
Notes:
•PCL Emulation is the factory default setting.
•PostScript emulation uses a PostScript interpreter for
processing print jobs.
•PCL Emulation uses a PCL interpreter for processing print
jobs.
•Setting a printer language default does not prevent a
software program from sending print jobs that use another
printer language.
Job Waiting
On
Off
Specify that print jobs be removed from the print queue when they
require unavailable printer options or custom settings. They are
stored in a separate print queue, so other jobs print normally. When
the missing information or options, or both are obtained, the stored
jobs print.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•This menu appears only when a formatted, working printer
hard disk is installed. This requirement ensures that stored
jobs are not deleted if the printer loses power.
Print Area
Normal
Fit to Page
Whole Page
Set the logical and physical printable area.
Notes:
•Normal is the factory default setting. When attempting to
print data in the non‑printable area defined by the Normal
setting, the printer clips the image at the boundary.
•Fit to Page fits the page content into the selected paper size.
•Whole Page allows the image to be moved into the
non‑printable area defined by the Normal setting, but the
printer clips the image at the Normal setting boundary. This
setting affects only pages printed using a PCL 5e interpreter
and has no effect on pages printed using the PCL XL or
PostScript interpreter.
Understanding the printer menus 194
Use To
Download Target
RAM
Flash
Disk
Set the storage location for downloads.
Notes:
•RAM is the factory default setting. Storing downloads in the
RAM is temporary.
•Storing downloads in a flash memory or in a printer hard disk
places them in permanent storage. Downloads remain in the
flash memory or printer hard disk even when the printer is
turned off.
•This menu item appears only if an optional flash memory or
a formatted, working printer hard disk is installed.
Resource Save
On
Off
Specify how the printer handles temporary downloads, such as
fonts and macros stored in the RAM, when the printer receives a
print job that requires more than the available memory.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting. This sets the printer to
retain downloads only until memory is needed. Downloads
are deleted in order to process print jobs.
•On sets the printer to retain downloads during language
changes and printer resets. If the printer runs out of
memory, then Memory Full [38] appears on the
printer display, but downloads are not deleted.
Print All Order
Alphabetical
Oldest First
Newest First
Specify the order in which held and confidential jobs are printed
when Print All is selected.
Note: Alphabetical is the factory default setting.
Finishing menu
Use To
Sides (Duplex)
1 sided
2 sided
Specify whether two‑sided (duplex) printing is set as the default for all print jobs.
Notes:
•“1 sided” is the factory default setting.
•You can set two‑sided printing from the printer software.
For Windows users:
Click File > Print, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
For Macintosh users:
Choose File > Print, and then adjust the settings from the Print dialog and pop‑up
menus.
Understanding the printer menus 195
Use To
Duplex Binding
Long Edge
Short Edge
Define the way duplexed pages are bound and printed.
Notes:
•Long Edge is the factory default setting. Long Edge assumes binding along the
long edge of the page (left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape).
•Short Edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for
portrait and left edge for landscape).
Copies
1–999
Specify the default number of copies for each print job.
Note: 1 is the factory default setting.
Blank Pages
Do Not Print
Print
Specify whether blank pages are inserted in a print job.
Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.
Collate
(1,1,1) (2,2,2)
(1,2,3) (1,2,3)
Stack the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies.
Notes:
•“(1,1,1) (2,2,2)” is the factory default setting.
•On stacks the print job in sequence.
Separator Sheets
Off
Between Copies
Between Jobs
Between Pages
Specify whether blank separator sheets are inserted.
Notes:
•None is the factory default setting.
•Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a print job if
Collate is set to “(1,2,3) (1,2,3).” If Collate is set to “(1,1,1) (2,2,2),” then a
blank page is inserted between each set of printed pages, such as after all
page 1's and after all page 2's.
•Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs.
•Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of a print job. This
setting is useful when printing transparencies or when inserting blank pages in
a document.
Separator Source
Tray [x]
Manual Feeder
Specify the paper source for separator sheets.
Notes:
•Tray 1 (standard tray) is the factory default setting.
•From the Paper menu, set Configure MP to "Cassette" for Manual Feeder to
appear as a menu setting.
Paper Saver
Off
2‑Up
3‑Up
4‑Up
6‑Up
9‑Up
12‑Up
16‑Up
Print multiple‑page images on one side of a paper.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•The number selected is the number of page images that will print per side.
Understanding the printer menus 196
Use To
Paper Saver Ordering
Horizontal
Reverse Horizontal
Reverse Vertical
Vertical
Specify the positioning of multiple‑page images when using Paper Saver.
Notes:
•Horizontal is the factory default setting.
•Positioning depends on the number of page images and whether they are in
portrait or landscape orientation.
Paper Saver Orientation
Auto
Landscape
Portrait
Specify the orientation of a multiple‑page document.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting. The printer chooses between portrait and
landscape.
Paper Saver Border
None
Solid
Print a border when using Paper Saver.
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Staple Job
Off
On
Specify whether printed output is stapled.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•This menu appears only when a supported staple finisher is installed.
Run Stapler Test Print a report that confirms that the staple finisher is functioning properly.
Note: This menu appears only when a supported staple finisher is installed.
Hole Punch
On
Off
Specify whether holes will be created on printed outputs for the purpose of collecting
the sheets in a binder or folder.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•This menu appears only when a supported staple, hole punch finisher is
installed.
Hole Punch Mode
2 holes
3 holes
4 holes
Specify the number of holes to be created on printed outputs for the purpose of
collecting the sheets in a binder or folder.
Notes:
•“3 holes” is the US factory default setting. “4 holes” is the international factory
default setting.
•This menu appears only when a supported staple, hole punch finisher is
installed.
Offset Pages
None
Between Copies
Between Jobs
Offset pages at certain instances.
Notes:
•None is the factory default setting.
•Between Copies offsets each copy of a print job if Collate is set to On. If Collate
is set to Off, then each set of printed pages are offset, such as all page 1's and
all page 2's.
•Between Jobs sets the same offset position for the entire print job regardless
of the number of copies printed.
•This menu appears only when a supported staple finisher is installed.
Understanding the printer menus 197
Quality menu
Use To
Print Resolution
300 dpi
600 dpi
1200 dpi
1200 Image Q
2400 Image Q
Specify the printed output resolution in dots per inch.
Note: 600 dpi is the factory default setting.
Pixel Boost
Off
Fonts
Horizontally
Vertically
Both directions
Isolated
Enable more pixels to print in clusters for clarity, in order to enhance images horizontally
or vertically, or to enhance fonts.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Toner Darkness
1–10
Lighten or darken the printed output.
Notes:
•8 is the factory default setting.
•Selecting a smaller number can help conserve toner.
Enhance Fine Lines
On
Off
Enable a print mode preferable for files such as architectural drawings, maps, electrical
circuit diagrams, and flow charts.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•You can set this option from the printer software. For Windows users, click File >
Print, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup. For Macintosh
users, choose File > Print, and then adjust the settings from the Print dialog and
pop‑up menus.
•To set this option using the Embedded Web Server, type the network printer IP
address in the Web browser address field.
Gray Correction
Auto
Off
Automatically adjust the contrast enhancement applied to images.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting.
Brightness
‑6 to 6
Adjust the printed output either by lightening or darkening it. You can conserve toner
by lightening the output.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Contrast
0–5
Adjust the contrast of printed objects.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Job Accounting menu
Note: This menu item appears only when a formatted, non-defective printer hard disk is installed. Make sure the
printer hard disk is not read/write‑ or write‑protected.
Understanding the printer menus 198
Use To
Job Accounting Log
Off
On
Determine and set if the printer creates a log of the print jobs it receives.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Job Accounting Utilities Print and delete log files or export them to a flash drive.
Accounting Log Frequency
Weekly
Monthly
Determine and set how often a log file is created.
Note: Monthly is the factory default setting.
Log Action at End of Frequency
None
E‑mail Current Log
E‑mail & Delete Current Log
Post Current Log
Post & Delete Current Log
Determine and set how the printer responds when the frequency threshold expires.
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Disk Near Full Level
Off
1–99
Specify the maximum size of the log file before the printer executes Disk Near Full
Action.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Disk Near Full Action
None
E‑mail Current Log
E‑mail & Delete Current Log
E‑mail & Delete Oldest Log
Post Current Log
Post & Delete Current Log
Post & Delete Oldest Log
Delete Current Log
Delete Oldest Log
Delete All Logs
Delete All But Current
Determine and set how the printer responds when the printer hard disk is nearly full.
Notes:
•None is the factory default setting.
•The value defined in Disk Near Full Level determines when this action is
triggered.
Disk Full Action
None
E‑mail & Delete Current Log
E‑mail & Delete Oldest Log
Post & Delete Current Log
Post & Delete Oldest Log
Delete Current Log
Delete Oldest Log
Delete All Logs
Delete All But Current
Determine and set how the printer responds when disk usage reaches the maximum
limit (100MB).
Note: None is the factory default setting.
URL to Post Logs Determine and set where the printer posts job accounting logs.
E-mail to Send Logs Specify the e‑mail address to which the printer sends job accounting logs.
Understanding the printer menus 199
Use To
Log File Prefix Specify the prefix you want for the log file name.
Note: The current host name defined in the TCP/IP menu is used as the default log
file prefix.
Utilities menu
Use To
Remove Held Jobs
Confidential
Held
Not Restored
All
Delete confidential and held jobs from the printer hard disk.
Notes:
•Selecting a setting affects only print jobs that are stored in the printer hard
disk. Bookmarks, print jobs on flash drives, and other types of held jobs are
not affected.
•Not Restored removes all Print and Hold jobs that are not restored from the
printer hard disk or printer memory.
Format Flash
Yes
No
Format the flash memory.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not turn off the printer while the flash memory is
being formatted.
Notes:
•Yes deletes all data stored in the flash memory.
•No cancels the format request.
•Flash memory refers to the memory added by installing a flash memory card in
the printer.
•The flash memory option card must not be read/write‑ or write‑protected.
•This menu item appears only when a formatted, working flash memory card is
installed.
Delete Downloads on Disk
Delete Now
Do Not Delete
Delete downloads from the printer hard disk, including all held jobs, buffered jobs,
and parked jobs.
Notes:
•Delete Now sets the printer to delete the downloads and allows the display to
return to the originating screen after the deletion.
•Do Not Delete sets the printer display to return to the main Utilities menu.
Activate Hex Trace Assist in isolating the source of a print job problem.
Notes:
•When activated, all data sent to the printer is printed in hexadecimal and
character representation, and control codes are not executed.
•To exit or deactivate Hex Trace, turn off the printer.
Coverage Estimator
Off
On
Provide an estimate of the percentage coverage of toner on a page. The estimate is
printed on a separate page at the end of each print job.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 200
XPS menu
Use To
Print Error Pages
Off
On
Print a page containing information on errors, including XML markup errors.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
PDF menu
Use To
Scale to Fit
Yes
No
Scale page content to fit the selected paper size.
Note: No is the factory default setting.
Annotations
Do Not Print
Print
Print annotations in a PDF.
Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.
PostScript menu
Use To
Print PS Error
On
Off
Print a page containing the PostScript error.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Lock PS Startup Mode
On
Off
Disable the SysStart file.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Font Priority
Resident
Flash/Disk
Establish the font search order.
Notes:
•Resident is the factory default setting.
•This menu item is available only when a formatted flash memory option
card or printer hard disk is installed and operating properly.
•Make sure the flash memory option or printer hard disk is not
read/write‑, write‑, or password‑protected.
•Job Buffer Size must not be set to 100%.
Understanding the printer menus 201
PCL Emul menu
Use To
Font Source
Resident
Disk
Download
Flash
All
Specify the set of fonts used by the Font Name menu.
Notes:
•“Resident” is the factory default setting. Resident shows the factory
default set of fonts downloaded in the RAM.
•“Flash” and “Disk” settings show all fonts resident in that option.
•The flash option must be properly formatted and cannot be read/write‑,
write‑, or password‑protected.
•“Download” shows all the fonts downloaded in the RAM.
•“All” shows all fonts available to any option.
Font Name
Courier 10
Identify a specific font and the option where it is stored.
Note: Courier 10 is the factory default setting. Courier 10 shows the font
name, font ID, and the storage location in the printer. The font source
abbreviation is R for Resident, F for Flash, K for Disk, and D for Download.
Symbol Set
10U PC‑8
12U PC‑850
Specify the symbol set for each font name.
Notes:
•10U PC‑8 is the US factory default setting. 12U PC‑850 is the international
factory default setting.
•A symbol set is a set of alphabetic and numeric characters, punctuation,
and special symbols. Symbol sets support the different languages or
specific programs such as math symbols for scientific text. Only the
supported symbol sets are shown.
PCL Emulation Settings
Point Size
1.00–1008.00
Change the point size for scalable typographic fonts.
Notes:
•12 is the factory default setting.
•Point size refers to the height of the characters in the font. One point
equals approximately 0.014 inch.
•Point sizes can be increased or decreased in 0.25‑point increments.
PCL Emulation Settings
Pitch
0.08–100
Specify the font pitch for scalable monospaced fonts.
Notes:
•10 is the factory default setting.
•Pitch refers to the number of fixed‑space characters per inch (cpi).
•Pitch can be increased or decreased in 0.01‑cpi increments.
•For nonscalable monospaced fonts, the pitch appears on the display but it
cannot be changed.
PCL Emulation Settings
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Specify the orientation of text and graphics on the page.
Notes:
•Portrait is the factory default setting. Portrait prints text and graphics
parallel to the short edge of the page.
•Landscape prints text and graphics parallel to the long edge of the page.
Understanding the printer menus 202
Use To
PCL Emulation Settings
Lines per Page
1–255
Specify the number of lines that print on each page.
Notes:
•60 is the US factory default setting. 64 is the international default setting.
•The printer sets the amount of space between each line based on the
Lines per Page, Paper Size, and Orientation settings. Select the Paper Size
and Orientation you want before setting Lines per Page.
PCL Emulation Settings
A4 Width
198 mm
203 mm
Set the printer to print on A4‑size paper.
Notes:
•“198 mm” is the factory default setting.
•The 203‑mm setting sets the width of the page to allow printing of eighty
10‑pitch characters.
PCL Emulation Settings
Auto CR after LF
On
Off
Specify whether the printer automatically performs a carriage return (CR) after
a line feed (LF) control command.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
PCL Emulation Settings
Auto LF after CR
On
Off
Specify whether the printer automatically performs a line feed (LF) after a
carriage return (CR) control command.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Tray Renumber
Assign MP Feeder
Off
None
0–199
Assign Tray [x]
Off
None
0–199
Assign Manual Paper
Off
None
0–199
Assign Manual Env
Off
None
0–199
Configure the printer to work with printer software or programs that use
different source assignments for trays and feeders.
Notes:
•“Off” is the factory default setting.
•“None” ignores the Select Paper Feed command. This option appears only
when it is selected by the PCL 5 interpreter.
•“0–199” allows a custom setting to be assigned.
Understanding the printer menus 203
Use To
Tray Renumber
View Factory Defaults
MPF Default = 8
T1 Default = 1
T1 Default = 4
T1 Default = 5
T1 Default = 20
T1 Default = 21
Env Default = 6
MPaper Default = 2
MEnv Default = 3
Display the factory default setting assigned to each tray or feeder.
Tray Renumber
Restore Defaults
Yes
No
Restore all tray and feeder assignments to the factory default settings.
HTML menu
Use To
Font Name
Albertus MT
Antique Olive
Apple Chancery
Arial MT
Avant Garde
Bodoni
Bookman
Chicago
Clarendon
Cooper Black
Copperplate
Coronet
Courier
Eurostile
Garamond
Geneva
Gill Sans
Goudy
Helvetica
Hoefler Text
Intl CG Times
Intl Courier
Intl Univers
Joanna MT
Letter Gothic
Lubalin Graph
Marigold
MonaLisa Recut
Monaco
New CenturySbk
New York
Optima
Oxford
Palatino
StempelGaramond
Taffy
Times
TimesNewRoman
Univers
Zapf Chancery
NewSansMTJA
NewSansMTCS
NewSansMTCT
NewSansMTKO
Set the default font for HTML documents.
Note: The Times font is used in HTML documents that do not
specify a font.
Understanding the printer menus 204
Use To
Font Size
1–255 pt
Set the default font size for HTML documents.
Notes:
•12 pt is the factory default setting.
•Font size can be increased in 1‑point increments.
Scale
1–400%
Scale the default font for HTML documents.
Notes:
•100% is the factory default setting.
•Scaling can be increased in 1% increments.
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Set the page orientation for HTML documents.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Margin Size
8–255 mm
Set the page margin for HTML documents.
Notes:
•19 mm is the factory default setting.
•Margin size can be increased in 1‑mm increments.
Backgrounds
Do Not Print
Print
Specify whether to print backgrounds on HTML documents.
Note: Print is the factory default setting.
Image menu
Use To
Auto Fit
On
Off
Select the optimal paper size, scaling, and orientation.
Note: On is the factory default setting. It overrides scaling and orientation settings
for some images.
Invert
On
Off
Invert bitonal monochrome images.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•This setting does not apply to GIF or JPEG images.
Scaling
Anchor Top Left
Best Fit
Anchor Center
Fit Height/Width
Fit Height
Fit Width
Scale the image to fit the selected paper size.
Notes:
•Best Fit is the factory default setting.
•When Auto Fit is set to On, Scaling is automatically set to Best Fit.
Understanding the printer menus 205
Use To
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Reverse Portrait
Reverse Landscape
Set the image orientation.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Help menu
The Help menu consists of a series of Help pages that are stored in the printer as PDFs. They contain information about
using the printer and performing printing tasks.
English, French, German, and Spanish translations are stored in the printer. Other translations are available at
http://support.lexmark.com.
Menu item Description
Print All Guides Prints all the guides
Print Quality Provides information about solving print quality issues
Printing Guide Provides information about loading paper and other specialty media
Media Guide Provides a list of the paper sizes supported in trays and feeders
Print Defects Guide Provides information about resolving print defects
Menu Map Provides a list of the printer control panel menus and settings
Information Guide Provides help in locating additional information
Connection Guide Provides information about connecting the printer locally (USB) or to a network
Moving Guide Provides instructions for safely moving the printer
Supplies Guide Provides part numbers for ordering supplies
Understanding the printer menus 206
Saving money and the environment
Lexmark is committed to environmental sustainability and is continually improving its printers to reduce their impact
on the environment. We design with the environment in mind, engineer our packaging to reduce materials, and provide
collection and recycling programs. For more information, see:
•The Notices chapter
•The Environmental Sustainability section of the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com/environment
•The Lexmark recycling program at www.lexmark.com/recycle
By selecting certain printer settings or tasks, you may be able to reduce your printer's impact even further. This chapter
outlines the settings and tasks that may yield a greater environmental benefit.
Saving paper and toner
Studies show that as much as 80% of the carbon footprint of a printer is related to paper usage. You can significantly
reduce your carbon footprint by using recycled paper and the following printing suggestions, such as printing on both
sides of the paper and printing multiple pages on one side of a single sheet of paper.
For information on how you can quickly save paper and energy using one printer setting, see “Using Eco‑Mode” on
page 86 or “Using Eco‑Mode” on page 134.
Using recycled paper
As an environmentally conscious company, Lexmark supports the use of recycled office paper produced specifically for
use in laser printers. For more information on recycled papers that work well with your printer, see “Using recycled
paper and other office papers” on page 146.
Conserving supplies
Use both sides of the paper
If your printer model supports duplex printing, then you can control whether print appears on one or two sides of the
paper by selecting 2‑sided printing from the Print dialog or from the Lexmark Toolbar.
Place multiple pages on one sheet of paper
You can print up to 16 consecutive pages of a multiple‑page document onto one side of a single sheet of paper by
selecting a setting from the Multipage printing (N‑Up) section of the Print dialog screen.
Check your first draft for accuracy
Before printing or making multiple copies of a document:
•Use the preview feature, which you can select from the Print dialog or from the Lexmark Toolbar to see how the
document will look like before you print it.
•Print one copy of the document to check its content and format for accuracy.
Saving money and the environment 207
Avoid paper jams
Correctly set the paper type and size to avoid paper jams. For more information, see “Avoiding jams” on page 222.
Recycling
Lexmark provides collection programs and environmentally progressive approaches to recycling. For more information,
see:
•The Notices chapter
•The Environmental Sustainability section of the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com/environment
•The Lexmark recycling program at www.lexmark.com/recycle
Recycling Lexmark products
To return Lexmark products for recycling:
1Go to www.lexmark.com/recycle.
2Find the product type you want to recycle, and then select your country or region from the list.
3Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
Note: Printer supplies and hardware not listed in the Lexmark collection program may be recycled through your local
recycling center. Contact your local recycling center to determine the items they accept.
Recycling Lexmark packaging
Lexmark continually strives to minimize packaging. Less packaging helps to ensure that Lexmark printers are transported
in the most efficient and environmentally sensitive manner and that there is less packaging to dispose of. These
efficiencies result in fewer greenhouse emissions, energy savings, and natural resource savings.
Lexmark cartons are 100% recyclable where corrugated recycling facilities exist. Facilities may not exist in your area.
The foam used in Lexmark packaging is recyclable where foam recycling facilities exist. Facilities may not exist in your
area.
When you return a cartridge to Lexmark, you can reuse the box that the cartridge came in. Lexmark will recycle the
box.
Returning Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling
Lexmark Cartridge Collection Program diverts millions of Lexmark cartridges from landfills annually by making it both
easy and free for Lexmark customers to return used cartridges to Lexmark for reuse or recycling. One hundred percent
of the empty cartridges returned to Lexmark are either reused or demanufactured for recycling. Boxes used to return
the cartridges are also recycled.
To return Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling, follow the instructions that came with your printer or cartridge and
use the prepaid shipping label. You can also do the following:
1Go to www.lexmark.com/recycle.
2From the Toner Cartridges section, select your country or region.
Saving money and the environment 208
3Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
Saving money and the environment 209
Maintaining the printer
Warning—Potential Damage: Failure to maintain optimum printer performance, or to replace parts and supplies,
may cause damage to your printer.
Ordering supplies
To order parts and supplies in the U.S., contact Lexmark at 1-800-539-6275 for information about Lexmark authorized
supplies dealers in your area. In other countries or regions, visit the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com or contact
the place where you purchased the printer.
Using genuine Lexmark parts and supplies
Your Lexmark printer is designed to function best with genuine Lexmark supplies and parts. Use of third-party supplies
or parts may affect the performance, reliability, or life of the printer and its imaging components. Use of third-party
supplies or parts can affect warranty coverage. Damage caused by the use of third-party supplies or parts is not covered
by the warranty. All life indicators are designed to function with Lexmark supplies and parts, and may deliver
unpredictable results if third-party supplies or parts are used. Imaging component usage beyond the intended life may
damage your Lexmark printer or its associated components.
Estimated number of remaining pages
The estimated number of remaining pages is based on the recent printing history of the printer. Its accuracy may
vary significantly and is dependent on many factors, such as actual document content, print quality settings, and
other printer settings.
The accuracy of the estimated number of remaining pages may decrease when the actual printing consumption is
different from the historical printing consumption. Consider the variable level of accuracy before purchasing or replacing
supplies based on the estimate. Until an adequate print history is obtained on the printer, the estimated cartridge yield is
based on approximately 5% coverage per page.
Ordering a toner cartridge
Notes:
•The estimated cartridge yield is based on approximately 5% coverage per page.
•Extremely low print coverage for extended periods of time may negatively affect actual yield.
Item Return Program cartridge
Extra High Yield Toner Cartridge 24B6015
Ordering an imaging unit
Extremely low print coverage for extended periods of time may cause imaging unit parts to fail prior to exhaustion of
toner.
For more information on replacing the imaging unit, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply.
Maintaining the printer 210
Part name Lexmark Return Program
Imaging unit 24B6025
Ordering staple cartridges
Part name Part number
Staple cartridges 25A0013
Ordering a maintenance kit
To identify the supported fuser type, view the label on the fuser. Do either of the following:
•Remove the toner cartridge and imaging unit. The two-digit fuser type code (such as 00 or 01) can be seen on the
front of the fuser.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes.
Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
•Pull down the printer rear door. The two-digit fuser type code (such as 00 or 01) can be seen on the rear of the
fuser.
Notes:
•Using certain types of paper may require more frequent replacement of the maintenance kit.
•The separator roller, fuser, pick roller assembly, and transfer roller are all included in the maintenance kit and
can be individually ordered and replaced if necessary.
•For more information on replacing the parts included in the maintenance kit, see the instruction sheet that
came with the part.
Lexmark Return Program fuser maintenance kit type
Fuser maintenance kit type Part number
M5100 Series Return Program fuser maintenance kit type 00 40X8420
M5100 Series Return Program fuser maintenance kit type 01 40X8421
M5100 Series Return Program fuser maintenance kit type 02 40X8422
M5100 Series Return Program fuser maintenance kit type 03 40X8423
M5100 Series Return Program fuser maintenance kit type 04 40X8424
Lexmark regular fuser maintenance kit type
Fuser maintenance kit type Part number
M5100 Series regular fuser maintenance kit type 05 40X8425
M5100 Series regular fuser maintenance kit type 06 40X8426
M5100 Series regular fuser maintenance kit type 07 40X8427
M5100 Series regular fuser maintenance kit type 08 40X8428
M5100 Series regular fuser maintenance kit type 09 40X8429
Maintaining the printer 211
Lexmark roller kit
Part number
M5100 Series roller kit 40X7706
Storing supplies
Choose a cool, clean storage area for the printer supplies. Store supplies right side up in their original packing until you
are ready to use them.
Do not expose supplies to:
•Direct sunlight
•Temperatures above 35°C (95°F)
•High humidity above 80%
•Salty air
•Corrosive gases
•Heavy dust
Replacing supplies
Replacing the toner cartridge
1Lift the front cover, and then pull down the multipurpose feeder door.
2
1
Maintaining the printer 212
2Pull the cartridge out of the printer using the handle.
3Unpack the new toner cartridge, then remove the packing material, and then shake the cartridge to redistribute
the toner.
4Insert the toner cartridge into the printer by aligning the side rails of the cartridge with the arrows on the side rails
inside the printer.
Note: Make sure the cartridge is fully pushed in.
Warning—Potential Damage: When replacing a toner cartridge, do not leave the imaging unit exposed to direct
light for an extended period of time. Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
Maintaining the printer 213
5Close the multipurpose feeder door and the front cover.
2
1
Replacing the imaging unit
1Lift the front cover, and then pull down the multipurpose feeder door.
2
1
Maintaining the printer 214
2Pull out the toner cartridge from the printer using the handle.
3Lift the green handle, and then pull out the imaging unit from the printer.
1
2
4Unpack the new imaging unit, and then shake it.
5Remove all packing material from the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes.
Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the photoconductor drum. Doing so may affect the print quality of
future print jobs.
Maintaining the printer 215
6Insert the imaging unit into the printer by aligning the arrows on the side rails of the imaging unit with the arrows
on the side rails inside the printer.
7Insert the toner cartridge into the printer by aligning the side rails of the cartridge with the arrows on the side rails
inside the printer.
Maintaining the printer 216
8Close the multipurpose feeder door and the front cover.
2
1
Replacing a staple cartridge
1Open the stapler door.
2Pull down the latch of the staple cartridge holder, and then pull the holder out of the finisher.
Maintaining the printer 217
3Squeeze both sides of the empty staple case with your fingers, and then remove the staple case from the cartridge.
1
1
2
4Insert the front side of the new staple case into the staple cartridge, and then push the rear side into the cartridge.
1
2
5Push the staple cartridge into the finisher until it clicks into place.
6Close the stapler door.
Cleaning the printer parts
Cleaning the printer
Note: You may need to perform this task after every few months.
Warning—Potential Damage: Damage to the printer caused by improper handling is not covered by the printer
warranty.
1Make sure that the printer is turned off and unplugged from the electrical outlet.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer,
unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer before
proceeding.
2Remove paper from the standard bin and multipurpose feeder.
3Remove any dust, lint, and pieces of paper around the printer using a soft brush or vacuum.
Maintaining the printer 218
4Dampen a clean, lint-free cloth with water, and use it to wipe the outside of the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not use household cleaners or detergents to prevent damage to the exterior
of the printer.
5Make sure all areas of the printer are dry before sending a new print job.
Emptying the hole punch box
1Pull out the hole punch box.
2Empty the container.
3Insert the emptied hole punch box back into the finisher until it clicks into place.
Moving the printer
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more
trained personnel to lift it safely.
Before moving the printer
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Before moving the printer, follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or
printer damage:
•Turn off the printer, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
•Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer.
•If two or more optional finishers are installed, then remove the finishers individually from the printer.
Notes:
–Make sure to remove the topmost finisher first.
Maintaining the printer 219
–To remove the finisher, hold the finisher on both sides, and then lift the latches to unlock the finisher.
•If the printer does not have a caster base but is configured with optional trays, then remove the trays.
Note: Slide the latch on the right side of the optional tray toward the front of the tray until it clicks into place.
•Use the handholds located on both sides of the printer to lift it.
•Make sure your fingers are not under the printer when you set it down.
Maintaining the printer 220
•Make sure there is adequate clearance around the printer.
•Use only the power cord provided with this product or the manufacturer's authorized replacement.
Warning—Potential Damage: Damage to the printer caused by improper moving is not covered by the printer
warranty.
Moving the printer to another location
The printer and its hardware options can be safely moved to another location by following these precautions:
•Any cart used to move the printer must have a surface able to support the full footprint of the printer.
•Any cart used to move the hardware options must have a surface able to support the dimensions of the hardware
options.
•Keep the printer in an upright position.
•Avoid severe jarring movements.
Shipping the printer
When shipping the printer, use the original packaging or call the place of purchase for a relocation kit.
Maintaining the printer 221
Clearing jams
Carefully select paper and specialty media and load them properly to avoid most jams. For more information, see
“Avoiding jams” on page 222. If jams occur, then follow the steps outlined in this chapter.
Note: Jam recovery is set to Auto by default. The printer reprints jammed pages unless the memory required to hold
the pages is needed for other printer tasks.
Avoiding jams
Load paper properly
•Make sure paper lies flat in the tray.
Correct loading of paper Incorrect loading of paper
•Do not remove a tray while the printer is printing.
•Do not load a tray while the printer is printing. Load it before printing, or wait for a prompt to load it.
•Do not load too much paper. Make sure the stack height is below the maximum paper fill indicator.
Clearing jams 222
•Do not slide the paper into the tray. Load paper as shown in the illustration.
•Make sure the guides in the tray or the multipurpose feeder are properly positioned and are not pressing tightly
against the paper or envelopes.
•Push the tray firmly into the printer after loading paper.
•If you are loading prepunched paper for use with the staple finisher, then make sure the holes on the long edge of
the paper are on the right side of the tray. For more information, see the “Loading paper and specialty media”
section of the User’s Guide.
Allow the paper to enter the optional mailbox bins properly
•Make sure to adjust the bin extender so that the paper size indicators match the size of the paper used.
Notes:
–If the bin extender is shorter than the size of the paper you are printing on, then the paper causes a jam in
the mailbox bin. For example, if you are printing on a legal-size paper and the bin extender is set to letter-
size, then a jam occurs.
–If the bin extender is longer than the size of the paper you are printing on, then the edges become uneven
and the paper is not stacked properly. For example, if you are printing on a letter-size paper and the bin
extender is set to legal-size, then the paper does not stack properly.
Clearing jams 223
•If paper needs to be returned to the mailbox bin, then insert the paper under the bin arm, and then push the paper
all the way back.
1
2
Note: If the paper is not under the bin arm, then a jam occurs due to an overfilled bin.
Use recommended paper
•Use only recommended paper or specialty media.
•Do not load wrinkled, creased, damp, bent, or curled paper.
•Flex, fan, and straighten paper or specialty media before loading it.
•Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.
•Do not mix paper sizes, weights, or types in the same tray.
•Make sure the paper size and type are set correctly on the computer or printer control panel.
•Store paper per manufacturer recommendations.
Understanding jam messages and locations
When a jam occurs, a message indicating the jam location and information to clear the jam appears on the printer
display. Open the doors, covers, and trays indicated on the display to remove the jam.
Notes:
•When Jam Assist is set to On, Discarding pages appears on the display and the printer flushes blank or
pages with partial prints to the standard bin after a jammed page is cleared. Check your printed output for blank
pages.
•When Jam Recovery is set to On or Auto, the printer reprints jammed pages. However, the Auto setting reprints
jammed pages if adequate printer memory is available.
Clearing jams 224
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
11
1
10
Jam location Printer message What to do
1Staple finisher [x]‑page jam, remove paper, open
stapler door. Leave paper in bin. [455–
457]
Remove paper from the stapler bin, open the stapler
door, then remove the staple cartridge, and then
remove the jammed staples.
2Standard bin [x]‑page jam, remove standard bin
jam. [203]
Remove jammed paper from the standard bin.
3Inside the printer [x]‑page jam, lift front cover to remove
cartridge. [200–201]
Open the front cover and the multipurpose feeder,
then remove the toner cartridge and the imaging unit,
and then remove the jammed paper.
4Multipurpose feeder [x]‑page jam, clear manual
feeder. [250]
Remove all paper from the multipurpose feeder, and
then remove the jammed paper.
5Duplex area [x]‑page jam, remove tray 1 to clear
duplex. [235–239]
Pull out tray 1 completely, then push down the front
duplex flap, and then remove the jammed paper.
6Trays [x]‑page jam, open tray [x]. [24x] Pull out the indicated tray, and then remove the
jammed paper.
7Output expander [x]‑page jam, remove paper, open
expander rear door. Leave paper in
bin. [41y.xx]
Open the rear door of the output expander, and then
remove the jammed paper.
8Upper rear door [x]‑page jam, open upper rear
door. [202]
Open the rear door of the printer, and then remove
the jammed paper.
Clearing jams 225
Jam location Printer message What to do
9Upper door and rear
duplex area
[x]‑page jam, open upper and lower
rear door. [231–234]
Open the rear door of the printer and the rear duplex
area, and then remove the jammed paper.
10 Mailbox [x]‑page jam, remove paper, open
mailbox rear door. Leave paper in
bin. [43y.xx]
Open the rear door of the mailbox, and then remove
the jammed paper.
11 Staple finisher rear
door
[x]‑page jam, remove paper, open
finisher rear door. Leave paper in
bin. [451]
Open the rear door of the staple finisher, and then
remove the jammed paper.
[x]‑page jam, lift front cover to remove cartridge. [200–201]
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.
1Lift the front cover, and then pull down the multipurpose feeder door.
2
1
Clearing jams 226
2Lift the green handle, and then pull the toner cartridge out of the printer.
3Place the cartridge aside.
4Lift the green handle, and then pull the imaging unit out of the printer.
1
2
5Place the imaging unit aside on a flat, smooth surface.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes.
Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
6Pull the jammed paper gently to the right, and then remove it from the printer.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
12
Warning—Potential Damage: The jammed paper may be covered with toner, which can stain garments and
skin.
Clearing jams 227
7Install the imaging unit.
Note: Use the arrows on the side of the printer as a guide.
8Insert the cartridge into the printer, and then push the green handle back into place.
Notes:
•Align the arrows on the guides of the toner cartridge with the arrows in the printer.
•Make sure the cartridge is fully pushed in.
Clearing jams 228
9Close the multipurpose feeder door and the front cover.
2
1
10 Touch or Done to clear the message and continue printing.
[x]‑page jam, open upper rear door. [202]
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.
1Pull down the rear door.
2Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
Clearing jams 229
3Close the rear door.
4Touch or Done to clear the message and continue printing.
[x]‑page jam, open upper and lower rear door. [231–234]
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.
1Pull down the rear door.
2Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
Clearing jams 230
3Close the rear door.
4Push the back of the standard tray.
5Press down the rear duplex flap, then firmly grasp the jammed paper, and then gently pull the paper out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
Clearing jams 231
1
2
6Insert the standard tray.
7Touch or Done to clear the message and continue printing.
[x]‑page jam, remove standard bin jam. [203]
1Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
2Touch or Done to clear the message and continue printing.
[x]‑page jam, remove tray 1 to clear duplex. [235–239]
1Pull out the tray completely.
Note: Lift the tray slightly, and then pull it out.
Clearing jams 232
1
2
3
2Push down the front duplex flap, then firmly grasp the jammed paper, and then gently pull the paper to the right
and out of the printer.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
1
2
3Insert the tray.
4Touch or Done to clear the message and continue printing.
Clearing jams 233
[x]‑page jam, open tray [x]. [24x]
1Check which tray is indicated on the printer display, and then pull the tray.
2Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
3Insert the tray.
4Touch or Done to clear the message and continue printing.
Clearing jams 234
[x]‑page jam, clear manual feeder [250]
1From the multipurpose feeder, firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
2Flex the sheets of paper back and forth to loosen them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the edges on a
level surface.
3Reload paper into the multipurpose feeder.
4Slide the paper guide until it lightly rests against the edge of the paper.
5Touch or Done to clear the message and continue printing.
Clearing jams 235
[x]‑page jam, remove paper, open stapler door. Leave paper in
bin. [455–457]
1From the stapler bin, firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
2Open the stapler door.
3Pull down the latch of the staple cartridge holder, and then pull the holder out of the printer.
Clearing jams 236
4Use the metal tab to lift the staple guard, and then remove any loose staples.
5Press down the staple guard until it clicks into place.
Clearing jams 237
6Press the staples against the metal bracket.
Note: If the staples are at the rear of the cartridge, then shake the cartridge downward to bring the staples near
the metal bracket.
7Push the cartridge holder firmly back into the stapler unit until the cartridge holder clicks into place.
8Close the stapler door.
9Touch or Done to clear the message and continue printing.
Clearing jams 238
[x]‑page jam, remove paper, open finisher rear door. Leave
paper in bin. [451]
1Open the rear staple finisher door.
2Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
3Close the staple finisher door.
4Touch or Done to clear the message and continue printing.
Clearing jams 239
[x]‑page jam, remove paper, open expander rear door. Leave
paper in bin. [41y.xx]
1Open the rear output expander door.
2Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
3Close the rear output expander door.
4Touch or Done to clear the message and continue printing.
Clearing jams 240
[x]‑page jam, remove paper, open mailbox rear door. Leave
paper in bin. [43y.xx]
1Open the rear mailbox door.
2Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
3Close the rear mailbox door.
Clearing jams 241
4 If the jam is in the mailbox bin, then firmly grasp the jammed paper, and then gently pull it out.
Notes:
•Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
•When using A4‑, Folio‑, or legal‑size paper, make sure to adjust the bin extender so that the paper enters
the bin properly.
5Touch or Done to clear the message and continue printing.
Clearing jams 242
Troubleshooting
Understanding the printer messages
Cartridge, imaging unit mismatch [41.xy]
1Check if the toner cartridge and imaging unit are both MICR (Magnetic Imaging Content Recording) or non-MICR
supplies.
Note: For a list of supported supplies, see the “Ordering supplies” section of the User's Guide or visit
www.lexmark.com.
2Change the toner cartridge or imaging unit so that both are MICR or non‑MICR supplies.
Notes:
•Use MICR toner cartridge and imaging unit for printing checks and other similar documents.
•Use non-MICR toner cartridge and imaging unit for regular print jobs.
Cartridge low [88.xy]
You may need to order a replacement toner cartridge. If necessary, touch Continue on the printer control panel to
clear the message and continue printing.
Cartridge nearly low [88.xy]
If necessary, touch Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing.
Cartridge very low, [x] estimated pages remain [88.xy]
You may need to replace the toner cartridge very soon. For more information, see the “Replacing supplies” section of
the User’s Guide.
If necessary, touch Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing.
Change [paper source] to [custom string] load [orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray, then specify the paper size and type in the Paper menu on the
printer control panel, and then touch Finished changing paper.
•Touch Reset active bin to reset the active tray for a linked set of trays.
•Cancel the print job.
Troubleshooting 243
Change [paper source] to [custom type name] load [orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray, then specify the paper size and type in the Paper menu on the
printer control panel, and then touch Finished changing paper.
•Touch Reset active bin to reset the active tray for a linked set of trays.
•Cancel the print job.
Change [paper source] to [paper size] load [orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray, then specify the paper size and type in the Paper menu on the
printer control panel, and then touch Finished changing paper.
•Touch Reset active bin to reset the active tray for a linked set of trays.
•Cancel the print job.
Change [paper source] to [paper type] [paper size] load [orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray, then specify the paper size and type in the Paper menu on the
printer control panel, and then touch Finished changing paper.
•Touch Reset active bin to reset the active tray for a linked set of trays.
•Cancel the print job.
Check tray [x] connection
Try one or more of the following:
•Turn off the printer, and then turn it back on.
If the error occurs a second time, then:
1Turn off the printer.
2Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3Remove the indicated tray.
4Reattach the tray.
5Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
6Turn the printer back on.
If the error occurs again, then:
1Turn off the printer.
2Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3Remove the tray.
4Contact customer support.
•From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and resume the job.
Troubleshooting 244
Close door or insert cartridge
The toner cartridge is missing or not installed properly. Insert the cartridge, and then close all doors and covers.
Close front door
Close the front door of the printer.
Complex page, some data may not have printed [39]
Try one or more of the following:
•From the printer control panel, touch Continue to ignore the message and continue printing.
•Cancel current print job.
•Install additional printer memory.
Configuration change, some held jobs were not restored [57]
Held jobs are invalidated because of the following possible changes in the printer:
•The printer firmware has been updated.
•The tray for the print job has been removed.
•The print job is sent from a flash drive that is no longer attached to the USB port.
•The printer hard disk contains print jobs that were stored when the hard disk was installed in a different printer
model.
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
Defective flash detected [51]
Try one or more of the following:
•Replace the defective flash memory card.
•From the printer control panel, touch Continue to ignore the message and continue printing.
•Cancel the current print job.
Disk full [62]
Try one or more of the following:
•From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and continue processing.
•Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored in the printer hard disk.
•Install a printer hard disk with larger capacity.
Disk must be formatted for use in this device
From the printer control panel, touch Format disk to format the printer hard disk and clear the message.
Note: Formatting deletes all the files stored in the printer hard disk.
Troubleshooting 245
Disk near full. Securely clearing disk space.
Try one or more of the following:
•Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
•Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored on the printer hard disk.
•Install a hard disk with higher capacity.
Empty the hole punch box
1Empty the hole punch box.
For instructions on emptying the hole punch box, from the printer control panel touch More Information.
2Reinsert the hole punch box into the finisher, and then touch Continue to clear the message.
Error reading USB drive. Remove USB.
An unsupported USB device is inserted. Remove the USB device, and then insert a supported one.
Error reading USB hub. Remove hub.
An unsupported USB hub has been inserted. Remove the USB hub, and then install a supported one.
Imaging unit low [84.xy]
You may need to order a replacement imaging unit. If necessary, select Continue on the printer control panel to clear
the message and continue printing.
Imaging unit nearly low [84.xy]
If necessary, touch Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing.
Imaging unit very low, [x] estimated pages remain [84.xy]
You may need to replace the imaging unit very soon. For more information, see the “Replacing supplies” section of the
User’s Guide.
If necessary, touch Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing.
Incompatible output bin [x] [59]
Try one or more of the following:
•Remove the indicated bin.
•From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing without using the
indicated bin.
Troubleshooting 246
Incompatible tray [x] [59]
Try one or more of the following:
•Remove the indicated tray.
•From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing without using the
indicated tray.
Incorrect paper size, open [paper source] [34]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray, and then specify the paper size and type in the Paper menu on
the printer control panel.
•Make sure the correct paper size and type are specified in Print Properties or the Print dialog settings.
•Check if the paper size is correctly set. For example, if MP Feeder Size is set to Universal, then make sure the paper
is large enough for the data being printed.
•Check the length and width guides and make sure the paper is loaded properly in the tray.
•From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and print using a different tray.
•Cancel the print job.
Insert hole punch box
Insert the hole punch box into the finisher, and then touch Continue to clear the message.
Insert staple cartridge
Try one or more of the following:
•Insert a staple cartridge.
•Touch Continue to clear the message and print without using the staple finisher.
Insert Tray [x]
Try one or more of the following:
•Insert the specified tray into the printer.
•Cancel the print job.
•Reset the active bin for a linked set of bins by selecting Reset active bin on the printer control panel.
Install bin [x]
Try one or more of the following:
•Install the specified bin:
1Turn off the printer.
2Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3Install the specified bin.
Troubleshooting 247
4Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5Turn the printer back on.
•Cancel the print job.
•Reset active bin
Install Tray [x]
Try one or more of the following:
•Install the specified tray:
1Turn off the printer.
2Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3Install the specified tray.
4Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5Turn the printer back on.
•Cancel the print job.
•Reset the active bin.
Insufficient memory for Flash Memory Defragment operation [37]
Try one or more of the following:
•From the printer control panel, touch Continue to stop the defragmentation and continue printing.
•Delete fonts, macros, and other data in the printer memory.
•Install additional printer memory.
Insufficient memory, some Held Jobs were deleted [37]
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
Insufficient memory, some held jobs will not be restored [37]
Try one or more of the following:
•From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
•Delete other held jobs to free up additional printer memory.
Insufficient memory to collate job [37]
Try one or more of the following:
•From the printer control panel, touch Continue to print the part of the job already stored and begin collating the
rest of the print job.
•Cancel the current print job.
Troubleshooting 248
Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature [35]
Install additional printer memory or touch Continue to disable Resource Save, clear the message, and continue printing.
Load [paper source] with [custom string] [paper orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the indicated tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper.
•To use the tray with the correct paper size or type, touch Finished loading paper on the printer control panel.
Note: If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper size and type, then it feeds from that tray. If the
printer cannot find a tray with the correct paper type and size, then it prints from the default paper source.
•Cancel the current job.
Load [paper source] with [custom type name] [paper orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper.
•To use the tray with the correct paper size or type, touch Finished loading paper on the printer control panel.
Note: If the printer detects a tray that has the correct paper size and type, then it feeds from that tray. If the
printer cannot detect a tray that has the correct paper size and type, then it prints from the default paper
source.
•Cancel the current job.
Load [paper source] with [paper size] [paper orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the specified tray or feeder with the correct size of paper.
•To use the tray or feeder with the correct size of paper, touch Finished loading paper on the printer control panel.
Note: If the printer finds a tray or feeder that has the correct size of paper, then it feeds from that tray or
feeder. If the printer cannot find a tray or feeder with the correct size of paper, then it prints from the default
paper source.
•Cancel the current job.
Load [paper source] with [paper type] [paper size] [paper orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the specified tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper.
•To use the tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper, touch Finished loading paper on the printer control
panel.
Note: If the printer finds a tray or feeder that has the correct size and type of paper, then it feeds from that tray
or feeder. If the printer cannot find a tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper, then it prints from
the default paper source.
•Cancel the current job.
Troubleshooting 249
Load Manual Feeder with [custom string] [paper orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the feeder with the correct size and type of paper.
•From the printer control panel, touch Prompt each page, paper loaded or Do not prompt, paper loaded to clear
the message and continue printing.
•From the printer control panel, touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray.
•Cancel the print job.
Load Manual Feeder with [custom type name] [paper orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the feeder with the correct size and type of paper.
•From the printer control panel, touch Prompt each page, paper loaded or Do not prompt, paper loaded to clear
the message and continue printing.
•From the printer control panel, touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray.
•Cancel the print job.
Load Manual Feeder with [paper size] [paper orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the feeder with the correct size of paper.
•From the printer control panel, touch Prompt each page, paper loaded or Do not prompt, paper loaded to clear
the message and continue printing.
•From the printer control panel, touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray.
•Cancel the print job.
Load Manual Feeder with [paper type] [paper size] [paper orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the feeder with the correct size and type of paper.
•From the printer control panel, touch Prompt each page, paper loaded or Do not prompt, paper loaded to clear
the message and continue printing.
•From the printer control panel, touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray.
•Cancel the print job.
Load staples
Try one or more of the following:
•Replace or insert the staple cartridge in the finisher.
For instructions on inserting or replacing a staple cartridge in the finisher, touch More information on the printer
control panel.
•From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
•From the printer control panel, touch Cancel job to cancel the print job.
Troubleshooting 250
Maintenance kit low [80.xy]
You may need to order a maintenance kit. For more information, contact customer support at
http://support.lexmark.com or your service representative. If necessary, touch Continue to clear the message and
continue printing.
Maintenance kit nearly low [80.xy]
For more information, contact customer support at http://support.lexmark.com or your service representative. If
necessary, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
Maintenance kit very low, [x] estimated pages remain [80.xy]
You may need to replace the maintenance kit very soon. For more information, contact customer support at
http://support.lexmark.com or your service representative. If necessary, touch Continue to clear the message and
continue printing.
Memory full [38]
Try one or more of the following:
•From the printer control panel, touch Cancel job to clear the message.
•Install additional printer memory.
Network [x] software error [54]
Try one or more of the following:
•From the printer control panel, touch Continue to continue printing.
•Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer back on.
•Update the network firmware in the printer or print server. For more information, contact customer support.
Non‑Lexmark [supply type], see User’s Guide [33.xy]
Note: The supply type can be toner cartridge, imaging unit, or fuser.
The printer has detected a non‑Lexmark supply or part installed in the printer.
Your Lexmark printer is designed to function best with genuine Lexmark supplies and parts. Use of third-party supplies
or parts may affect the performance, reliability, or life of the printer and its imaging components.
All life indicators are designed to function with Lexmark supplies and parts, and may deliver unpredictable results if
third-party supplies or parts are used. Imaging component usage beyond the intended life may damage your Lexmark
printer or associated components.
Warning—Potential Damage: Use of third-party supplies or parts can affect warranty coverage. Damage caused by
the use of third-party supplies or parts may not be covered by the warranty.
To accept any and all of these risks, and to proceed with the use of non-genuine supplies or parts in your printer, touch
and hold and the # on the printer control panel simultaneously for 15 seconds to clear the message and continue
printing.
Troubleshooting 251
If you do not want to accept these risks, then remove the third-party supply or part from your printer, and then install
a genuine Lexmark supply or part.
Note: For the list of supported supplies, see the “Ordering supplies” section of the User's Guide or visit
www.lexmark.com.
Not enough free space in flash memory for resources [52]
Try one or more of the following:
•From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
•Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored in the flash memory.
•Install a flash memory card with larger capacity.
Note: Downloaded fonts and macros not previously stored in the flash memory are deleted.
Paper changes needed
Try one or more of the following:
•Touch Use current supplies to clear the message and continue printing.
•Cancel the current print job.
Parallel port [x] disabled [56]
Try one or more of the following:
•From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
•Enable the parallel port. From the printer control panel, navigate to:
Network/Ports > Parallel [x] > Parallel Buffer > Auto
Note: The printer discards any data received through the parallel port.
Printer had to restart. Last job may be incomplete.
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
For more information, visit http://support.lexmark.com or contact customer support.
Reattach bin [x]
Try one or more of the following:
•Turn off the printer, and then turn it back on.
•Reattach the indicated bin.
1Turn off the printer.
2Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3Remove the indicated bin.
4Reattach the bin.
Troubleshooting 252
5Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
6Turn the printer back on.
•Remove the indicated bin:
1Turn off the printer.
2Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3Remove the indicated bin.
4Contact customer support at http://support.lexmark.com or your service representative.
•From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and print without using the specified bin.
Reattach bins [x] – [y]
Try one or more of the following:
•Turn off the printer, and then turn it back on.
•Reattach the indicated bins:
1Turn off the printer.
2Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3Remove the indicated bins.
4Reattach the bins.
5Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
6Turn the printer back on.
•Remove the indicated bins:
1Turn off the printer.
2Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3Remove the indicated bins.
4Contact customer support at http://support.lexmark.com or your service representative.
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and print without using the indicated bins.
Reinstall missing or unresponsive cartridge [31.xy]
Try one or more of the following:
•Check if the toner cartridge is missing. If missing, install the toner cartridge.
For information on installing the cartridge, see the “Replacing supplies” section of the User’s Guide.
•If the toner cartridge is installed, then remove the unresponsive toner cartridge, and then reinstall it.
Note: If the message appears after reinstalling the supply, then the cartridge is defective. Replace the toner
cartridge.
Troubleshooting 253
Reinstall missing or unresponsive fuser [31.xy]
Try one or more of the following:
•Remove the unresponsive fuser, and then reinstall it.
Note: If the message appears after reinstalling the supply, then the fuser is defective. Replace the fuser.
•Install the missing fuser.
For more information on installing the fuser, see the instruction sheet that came with the part.
Reinstall missing or unresponsive imaging unit [31.xy]
Try one or more of the following:
•Check if the imaging unit is missing. If missing, install the imaging unit.
For information on installing the imaging unit, see the “Replacing supplies” section of the User’s Guide.
•If the imaging unit is installed, then remove the unresponsive imaging unit, and then reinstall it.
Note: If the message appears after reinstalling the supply, then the imaging unit is defective. Replace the
imaging unit.
Remove defective disk [61]
Remove and replace the defective printer hard disk.
Remove packaging material, [area name]
Remove any remaining packaging material from the specified location.
Remove paper from all bins
Remove the paper from all of the bins. The printer automatically senses paper removal and resumes printing.
If removing the paper does not clear the message, then touch Continue.
Remove paper from bin [x]
Remove the paper from the specified bin. The printer automatically senses paper removal and resumes printing.
If removing the paper does not clear the message, then touch Continue.
Remove paper from [linked set bin name]
Remove paper from the specified bin. The printer automatically detects paper removal and resumes printing.
If removing the paper does not clear the message, then touch Continue.
Remove paper from standard output bin
Remove the paper stack from the standard bin.
Troubleshooting 254
Replace cartridge, 0 estimated pages remain [88.xy]
Replace the toner cartridge to clear the message and continue printing. For more information, see the instruction sheet
that came with the supply or see the “Replacing supplies” section of the User’s Guide.
Note: If you do not have a replacement cartridge, then see the “Ordering supplies” section of the User’s Guide or
visit www.lexmark.com.
Replace cartridge, printer region mismatch [42.xy]
Install a toner cartridge that matches the region number of the printer. x indicates the value of the printer region. y
indicates the value of the cartridge region. x and y can have the following values:
List of printer and toner cartridge regions
Region number Region
0Global
1 United States, Canada
2 European Economic Area (EEA), Switzerland
3 Asia Pacific, Australia, New Zealand
4 Latin America
5 Africa, Middle East, rest of Europe
9Invalid
Notes:
•The x and y values are the .xy of the error code shown on the printer control panel.
•The x and y values must match for printing to continue.
Replace imaging unit, 0 estimated pages remain [84.xy]
Replace the imaging unit to clear the message and continue printing. For more information, see the instruction sheet
that came with the supply or see the “Replacing supplies” section of the User’s Guide.
Note: If you do not have a replacement imaging unit, then see the “Ordering supplies” section of the User’s Guide or
visit www.lexmark.com.
Replace maintenance kit, 0 estimated pages remain [80.xy]
Contact customer support at http://support.lexmark.com or your service representative, and then report the message.
The printer is scheduled for maintenance.
Troubleshooting 255
Replace unsupported cartridge [32.xy]
Remove the toner cartridge, and then install a supported one to clear the message and continue printing. For more
information, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply or see the “Replacing supplies” section of the User’s
Guide.
Note: If you do not have a replacement cartridge, then see the “Ordering supplies” section of the User’s Guide or
visit www.lexmark.com.
Replace unsupported fuser [32.xy]
Remove the fuser, and then install a supported one. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with
the part.
Replace unsupported imaging unit [32.xy]
Remove the imaging unit, and then install a supported one to clear the message and continue printing. For more
information, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply or see the “Replacing supplies” section of the User’s
Guide.
Note: If you do not have a replacement imaging unit, then see the “Ordering supplies” section of the User’s Guide or
visit www.lexmark.com.
Restore held jobs?
Try one or more of the following:
•From the printer control panel, touch Restore to restore all held jobs stored in the printer hard disk.
•From the printer control panel, touch Do not restore if you do not want to restore any of the print jobs.
Serial option [x] error [54]
Try one or more of the following:
•From the printer control panel, touch Continue to continue printing.
•Check that the serial cable is properly connected and is the correct one for the serial port.
•Check that the serial interface parameters (protocol, baud, parity, and data bits) are set correctly on the printer
and computer.
•Turn off the printer, and then turn it back on.
Serial port [x] disabled [56]
Try one or more of the following:
•From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
The printer discards any data received through the specified serial port.
•Make sure Serial Buffer is not set to Disabled.
•From the printer control panel, set Serial Buffer to Auto in the Serial [x] menu.
Troubleshooting 256
Some held jobs were not restored
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to delete the indicated job.
Note: Held jobs that are not restored remain in the printer hard disk and are inaccessible.
Standard network software error [54]
Try one or more of the following:
•From the printer control panel, touch Continue to continue printing.
•Turn off the printer, and then turn it back on.
•Update the network firmware in the printer or print server. For more information, contact customer support.
Standard USB port disabled [56]
Try one or more of the following:
•From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
•Enable the USB port. From the printer control panel, navigate to:
Network/Ports > USB Buffer > Auto
Note: The printer discards any data received through the USB port.
Supply needed to complete job
Do either of the following:
•Install the missing supply to complete the job.
•Cancel the current job.
Too many bins attached [58]
1Turn off the printer.
2Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3Remove the extra bins.
4Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5Turn the printer back on.
Too many disks installed [58]
1Turn off the printer.
2Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3Remove the extra printer hard disks.
4Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5Turn the printer back on.
Troubleshooting 257
Too many flash options installed [58]
1Turn off the printer.
2Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3Remove the extra flash memory.
4Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5Turn the printer back on.
Too many trays attached [58]
1Turn off the printer.
2Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3Remove the extra trays.
4Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5Turn the printer back on.
Tray [x] paper size unsupported
The paper size in the specified tray is unsupported. Replace it with a supported paper size.
Unformatted flash detected [53]
Try one or more of the following:
•From the printer control panel, touch Continue to stop the defragmentation and continue printing.
•Format the flash memory.
Note: If the error message remains, then the flash memory may be defective and needs to be replaced.
Unsupported disk
Remove the unsupported printer hard disk, and then insert a supported one.
Unsupported option in slot [x] [55]
1Turn off the printer.
2Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3Remove the unsupported option card from the printer controller board, and then replace it with a supported card.
4Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5Turn the printer back on.
Troubleshooting 258
USB port [x] disabled [56]
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
Notes:
•The printer discards any data received through the USB port.
•Make sure the USB Buffer menu is not set to Disabled.
Solving printer problems
•“Printer does not respond” on page 259
•“Printing problems” on page 261
•“Hardware and internal option problems” on page 268
•“Paper feed problems” on page 272
•“Print quality problems” on page 274
Printer does not respond
The printer is not responding
Action Yes No
Step 1
Make sure the printer is turned on.
Is the printer turned on?
Go to step 2. Turn on the printer.
Step 2
Check if the printer is in Sleep mode or Hibernate mode.
Is the printer in Sleep mode or Hibernate mode?
Press the Sleep button
to wake the printer
from Sleep mode or
Hibernate mode.
Go to step 3.
Step 3
Check if one end of the power cord is plugged into the printer and the
other to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
Is the power cord plugged into the printer and a properly grounded
electrical outlet?
Go to step 4. Plug one end of the
power cord into the
printer and the other to
a properly grounded
electrical outlet.
Step 4
Check other electrical equipment plugged into the electrical outlet.
Does other electrical equipment work?
Unplug the other
electrical equipment,
and then turn on the
printer. If the printer
does not work, then
reconnect the other
electrical equipment.
Go to step 5.
Troubleshooting 259
Action Yes No
Step 5
Check if the cables connecting the printer and the computer are inserted
in the correct ports.
Are the cables inserted in the correct ports?
Go to step 6. Make sure to match the
following:
•The USB symbol on
the cable with the
USB symbol on the
printer
•The appropriate
Ethernet cable with
the Ethernet port
Step 6
Make sure the electrical outlet is not turned off by a switch or breaker.
Is the electrical outlet turned off by a switch or breaker?
Turn on the switch or
reset the breaker.
Go to step 7.
Step 7
Check if the printer is plugged into any surge protectors, uninterruptible
power supplies, or extension cords.
Is the printer plugged into any surge protectors, uninterruptible power
supplies, or extension cords?
Connect the printer
power cord directly to
a properly grounded
electrical outlet.
Go to step 8.
Step 8
Check if one end of the printer cable is plugged into a port on the printer
and the other to the computer, print server, option, or other network
device.
Is the printer cable securely attached to the printer and the computer,
print server, option, or other network device?
Go to step 9. Connect the printer
cable securely to the
printer and the
computer, print server,
option, or other
network device.
Step 9
Make sure to install all hardware options properly and remove any packing
material.
Are all hardware options properly installed and all packing material
removed?
Go to step 10. Turn off the printer,
remove all packing
materials, then
reinstall the hardware
options, and then turn
on the printer.
Step 10
Check if you have selected the correct port settings in the printer driver.
Are the port settings correct?
Go to step 11. Use correct printer
driver settings.
Step 11
Check the installed printer driver.
Is the correct printer driver installed?
Go to step 12. Install the correct
printer driver.
Step 12
Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the
printer back on.
Is the printer working?
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
Troubleshooting 260
Printer display is blank
Action Yes No
Step 1
Press the Sleep button on the printer control panel.
Does Ready appear on the printer display?
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Step 2
Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the
printer back on.
Do Please wait and Ready appear on the printer display?
The problem is solved. Turn off the printer,
and then contact
customer support.
Printing problems
Confidential and other held jobs do not print
Action Yes No
Step 1
aFrom the printer control panel, open the Held Jobs folder, and then
verify that your print job is listed.
bResend the print job.
For more information, see“Printing confidential and other held jobs”
on page 81 or “Printing confidential and other held jobs” on page
129.
Did the jobs print?
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Step 2
Do one or more of the following:
•Delete the print job, and then resend it.
•If you are printing PDF files, then generate a new file, and then print
it again.
Did the jobs print?
The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
Step 3
aIncrease the printer memory. Do one or more of the following:
•Delete some print jobs.
•Install additional printer memory.
bResend the print job.
Did the jobs print?
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
Troubleshooting 261
Envelope seals when printing
Action Yes No
aUse envelopes that have been stored in a dry environment.
Note: Printing on envelopes with high moisture content can seal the
flaps.
bResend the print job.
Does the envelope seal when printing?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is solved.
Error message about reading the flash drive appears
Action Yes No
Step 1
Check if the flash drive is inserted into the front USB slot.
Note: The flash drive will not work if it is inserted into the rear USB slot.
Is the flash drive inserted into the front USB slot?
Go to step 2. Insert the flash drive
into the front USB slot.
Step 2
Check if the indicator light on the printer control panel is blinking green.
Note: A green blinking light indicates that the printer is busy.
Is the indicator light blinking green?
Wait until the printer is
ready, then view the
held jobs list, and then
print the documents.
Go to step 3.
Step 3
aCheck for an error message on the display.
bClear the message.
Does the error message still appear?
Go to step 4. The problem is solved.
Step 4
Check if the flash drive is supported.
For more information on tested and approved USB flash drives, see
“Supported flash drives and file types” on page 79 or “Supported flash
drives and file types” on page 127.
Does the error message still appear?
Go to step 5. The problem is solved.
Step 5
Check if the USB slot is disabled by the system support person.
Does the error message still appear?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is solved.
Troubleshooting 262
Incorrect characters print
Action Yes No
Step 1
Make sure the printer is not in Hex Trace mode.
Note: If Ready Hex appears on the printer display, then turn off the
printer, and then turn it back on to deactivate Hex Trace mode.
Is the printer in Hex Trace mode?
Deactivate Hex Trace
mode.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
aFrom the printer control panel, select Standard Network or
Network [x], and then set SmartSwitch to On.
bResend the print job.
Do incorrect characters print?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is solved.
Job prints from the wrong tray or on the wrong paper
Action Yes No
Step 1
aCheck if you are printing on paper that is supported by the tray.
bResend the print job.
Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper?
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Step 2
aFrom the Paper menu on the printer control panel, set the paper size
and type to match the paper loaded in the tray.
bResend the print job.
Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper?
The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
Step 3
aDepending on your operating system, open Printing Preferences or
the Print dialog, and then specify the paper type.
bResend the print job.
Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper?
The problem is solved. Go to step 4.
Step 4
aCheck if the trays are not linked.
bResend the print job.
Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper?
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
Troubleshooting 263
Large jobs do not collate
Action Yes No
Step 1
aFrom the Finishing menu on the printer control panel, set Collate to
(1,2,3) (1,2,3).
bResend the print job.
Did the job print and collate correctly?
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Step 2
aFrom the printer software, set Collate to (1,2,3) (1,2,3).
Note: Setting Collate to (1,1,1) (2,2,2) in the software overrides the
setting in the Finishing menu.
bResend the print job.
Did the job print and collate correctly?
The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
Step 3
Reduce the complexity of the print job by eliminating the number and size
of fonts, the number and complexity of images, and the number of pages
in the job.
Did the job print and collate correctly?
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
Multiple‑language PDF files do not print
Action Yes No
Step 1
aCheck if the print options for the PDF output are set to embed all fonts.
bGenerate a new PDF file, and then resend the print job.
Do the files print?
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Step 2
aOpen the document you want to print in Adobe Acrobat.
bClick File > Print > Advanced > Print As Image > OK > OK .
Do the files print?
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
Troubleshooting 264
Print job takes longer than expected
Action Yes No
Step 1
Change the environmental settings of the printer.
aFrom the printer control panel, navigate to:
Settings > General Settings
bSelect Eco‑Mode or Quiet Mode, and then select Off.
Note: Disabling Eco-Mode or Quiet Mode may increase the
consumption of energy or supplies, or both.
Did the job print?
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Step 2
Reduce the number and size of fonts, the number and complexity of
images, and the number of pages in the print job, and then resend the job
Did the job print?
The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
Step 3
aRemove held jobs stored in the printer memory.
bResend the print job.
Did the job print?
The problem is solved. Go to step 4.
Step 4
aDisable the Page Protect feature.
From the printer control panel, navigate to:
Settings > General Settings > Print Recovery > Page Protect > Off
bResend the print job.
Did the job print?
The problem is solved. Go to step 5.
Step 5
Install additional printer memory, and then resend the print job.
Did the job print?
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
Print jobs do not print
Action Yes No
Step 1
aFrom the document you are trying to print, open the Print dialog and
check if you have selected the correct printer.
Note: If the printer is not the default printer, then you must select
the printer for each document that you want to print.
bResend the print job.
Do the jobs print?
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Troubleshooting 265
Action Yes No
Step 2
aCheck if the printer is plugged in and turned on, and if Ready appears
on the printer display.
bResend the print job.
Do the jobs print?
The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
Step 3
If an error message appears on the printer display, then clear the message.
Note: The printer continues to print after clearing the message.
Do the jobs print?
The problem is solved. Go to step 4.
Step 4
aCheck if the ports (USB, serial, or Ethernet) are working and if the
cables are securely connected to the computer and the printer.
Note: For more information, see the setup documentation that
came with the printer.
bResend the print job.
Do the jobs print?
The problem is solved. Go to step 5.
Step 5
aTurn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the
printer back on.
bResend the print job.
Do the jobs print?
The problem is solved. Go to step 6.
Step 6
aRemove, and then reinstall the printer software. For more
information, see “Installing the printer software” on page 37.
Note: The printer software is available at
http://support.lexmark.com.
bResend the print job.
Do the jobs print?
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
Printing slows down
Notes:
•When printing using narrow paper, the printer prints at a reduced speed to prevent damage to the fuser.
•The printer speed may be reduced when printing for long periods of time, or printing at elevated temperatures.
Troubleshooting 266
Action Yes No
Step 1
aMake sure the size of the paper loaded in the tray matches the fuser
type.
Note: Use a 110-volt fuser for printing on letter-size paper and a
220-volt fuser for printing on A4‑size paper.
bResend the print job.
Does the print speed increase?
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Step 2
aReplace the fuser. For more information on installing the fuser, see
the instruction sheet that came with the part.
bResend the print job.
Does the print speed increase?
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
Tray linking does not work
Notes:
•The trays can detect paper length.
•The multipurpose feeder does not automatically detect the paper size. You must set the size from the Paper
Size/Type menu.
Action Yes No
Step 1
aOpen the trays, and then check if they contain paper of the same size
and type.
•Check if the paper guides are in the correct positions for the size
of the paper loaded in each tray.
•Check if the paper size indicators on the paper guides are aligned
with the paper size indicators on the tray.
bResend the print job.
Do the trays link correctly?
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Step 2
aFrom the printer control panel, set the paper size and type in the Paper
menu to match the paper loaded in the trays to be linked.
Note: The paper size and type must match for trays to be linked.
bResend the print job.
Do the trays link correctly?
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
Troubleshooting 267
Unexpected page breaks occur
Action Yes No
Increase the printing timeout.
aFrom the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Timeouts
bIncrease the Print Timeout setting, and then touch Submit.
cResend the print job.
Did the file print correctly?
The problem is solved. Check the original file
for manual page
breaks.
Hardware and internal option problems
2100-sheet tray problems
Action Yes No
Step 1
aPull out the tray, and then do one or more of the following:
•Make sure paper lies flat in the tray.
•Check for paper jams or misfeeds.
•Check if the paper size indicators on the paper guides are aligned
with the paper size indicators on the tray.
•Check if the paper guides are aligned against the edges of the
paper.
•Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper fill indicator.
•Check if you are printing on a recommended paper size and type.
•Check if the paper or specialty media meets specifications and is
not damaged.
bInsert the tray properly.
Note: Press the paper stack down while inserting the tray.
Does the tray operate properly?
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Step 2
Turn off the printer, then wait about 10 seconds, and then turn it back on.
Does the tray operate properly?
The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
Step 3
Print a menu settings page, and then check if the tray is listed in the
Installed Features list.
Note: If the tray is listed in the menu settings page, but paper jams
when it enters or exits the tray, then it may not be properly installed.
Is the tray listed in the menu settings page?
Go to step 4. For more information,
see the setup sheet
that came with the
2100-sheet tray.
Troubleshooting 268
Action Yes No
Step 4
Check if the tray is available in the printer driver.
Note: You may need to manually add the tray in the printer driver to
make it available for print jobs. For more information, see “Updating
available options in the printer driver” on page 38.
Is the tray available in the printer driver?
Go to step 5. Manually add the tray
in the printer driver.
Step 5
Check if the tray is selected.
From the application you are using, select the tray. If you are using
Mac OS X version 9, then make sure the printer is set up in Chooser.
Does the tray operate properly?
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
Cannot detect internal option
Action Yes No
Step 1
Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn on the
printer.
Does the internal option operate correctly?
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Step 2
Check if the internal option is properly installed in the controller board.
aTurn off the printer using the power switch, and then unplug the power
cord from the electrical outlet.
bMake sure the internal option is installed in the appropriate connector
in the controller board.
cConnect the power cord to the printer, then to a properly grounded
electrical outlet, and then turn on the printer.
Is the internal option properly installed in the controller board?
Go to step 3. Connect the internal
option to the controller
board.
Step 3
Print a menu settings page, and then check to see if the internal option is
listed in the Installed Features list.
Is the internal option listed in the menu settings page?
Go to step 4. Reinstall the internal
option.
Troubleshooting 269
Action Yes No
Step 4
aCheck if the internal option is selected.
It may be necessary to manually add the internal option in the printer
driver to make it available for print jobs. For more information, see
“Updating available options in the printer driver” on page 38.
bResend the print job.
Does the internal option operate correctly?
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
Internal print server does not operate correctly
Action Yes No
Step 1
Reinstall the internal print server.
aRemove, and then install the internal print server. For more
information, see “Installing an Internal Solutions Port” on page 18.
bPrint a menu settings page, and then check if the internal print server
is listed in the Installed Features list.
Is the internal print server listed in the Installed Features list?
Go to step 2. Check if the internal
print server is
supported by the
printer.
Note: An internal print
server from another
printer may not work
with this printer.
Step 2
Check the cable and the internal print server connection.
Use the correct cable, and then check if it is securely connected to the
internal print server.
Does the internal print server operate correctly?
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
Tray problems
Action Yes No
Step 1
aPull out the tray, and then do one or more of the following:
•Check for paper jams or misfeeds.
•Check if the paper size indicators on the paper guides are aligned
with the paper size indicators on the tray.
•If you are printing on custom‑size paper, then make sure that the
paper guides rest against the edges of the paper.
•Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper fill indicator.
•Make sure paper lies flat in the tray.
bCheck if the tray closes properly.
Is the tray working?
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Troubleshooting 270
Action Yes No
Step 2
aTurn off the printer, then wait about 10 seconds, and then turn the
printer back on.
bResend the print job.
Is the tray working?
The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
Step 3
Check if the tray is installed and recognized by the printer.
Print a menu settings page, and then check if the tray is listed in the
Installed Features list.
Is the tray listed in the menu settings page?
Go to step 4. Reinstall the tray. For
more information, see
the setup
documentation that
came with the tray.
Step 4
Check if the tray is available in the printer driver.
Note: If necessary, manually add the tray in the printer driver to make it
available for print jobs. For more information, see “Updating available
options in the printer driver” on page 38.
Is the tray available in the printer driver?
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
Internal Solutions Port does not operate correctly
Action Yes No
Step 1
Make sure the Internal Solutions Port (ISP) is installed.
aInstall the ISP. For more information, see “Installing an Internal
Solutions Port” on page 18.
bPrint a menu settings page, and then check if the ISP is listed in the
Installed Features list.
Is the ISP listed in the Installed Features list?
Go to step 2. Check if you have a
supported ISP.
Note: An ISP from
another printer may
not work on this
printer.
Step 2
Check the cable and the ISP connection.
aUse the correct cable, and then make sure it is securely connected to
the ISP.
bCheck if the ISP solution interface cable is securely connected into the
receptacle of the controller board.
Note: The ISP solution interface cable and the receptacle on the
controller board are color‑coded.
Does the Internal Solutions Port operate correctly?
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
Troubleshooting 271
USB/parallel interface card does not operate correctly
Action Yes No
Step 1
Make sure the USB or parallel interface card is installed.
aInstall the USB or parallel interface card. For more information, see
“Installing an Internal Solutions Port” on page 18.
bPrint a menu settings page, and then check if the USB or parallel
interface card is listed in the Installed Features list.
Is the USB or parallel interface card listed in the Installed Features list?
Go to step 2. Check if you have a
supported USB or
parallel interface card.
Note: A USB or parallel
interface card from
another printer may
not work on this
printer.
Step 2
Check the cable and the USB or parallel interface card connection.
Use the correct cable, and then make sure it is securely connected to
the USB or parallel interface card.
Does the USB or parallel interface card operate correctly?
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
Paper feed problems
Jammed pages are not reprinted
Action Yes No
Turn on Jam Recovery.
aFrom the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Print Recovery
bFrom the Jam Recovery menu, touch the arrows to scroll to On or
Auto.
cTouch Submit.
Do pages reprint after a jam?
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
Troubleshooting 272
Paper frequently jams
Action Yes No
Step 1
aPull out the tray, and then do one or more of the following:
•Make sure paper lies flat in the tray.
•Check if the paper size indicators on the paper guides are aligned
with the paper size indicators on the tray.
•Check if the paper guides are aligned against the edges of the
paper.
•Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper fill indicator.
•Check if you are printing on a recommended paper size and type.
bInsert the tray properly.
If jam recovery is enabled, then the print jobs will reprint
automatically.
Do paper jams still occur frequently?
Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
Step 2
aLoad paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in
its original wrapper until you use it.
bResend the print job.
Do paper jams still occur frequently?
Go to step 3. The problem is solved.
Step 3
aReview the tips on avoiding jams. For more information, see “Avoiding
jams” on page 222.
bFollow the recommendations, and then resend the print job.
Do paper jams still occur frequently?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is solved.
Paper jam message remains after jam is cleared
Action Yes No
aTouch or Done.
bFollow the instructions on the printer display.
Does the paper jam message remain?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is solved.
Troubleshooting 273
Print quality problems
Characters have jagged or uneven edges
Action Yes No
Step 1
aPrint a font sample list to check if the fonts you are using are supported
by the printer.
1From the printer control panel, navigate to:
Menus > Reports > Print Fonts
2Select PCL Fonts or PostScript Fonts.
bResend the print job.
Are you using fonts that are supported by the printer?
Go to step 2. Select a font that is
supported by the
printer.
Step 2
Check if the fonts installed on the computer are supported by the printer.
Are the fonts installed on the computer supported by the printer?
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
Clipped pages or images
Leading edge
Trailing edge
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Action Yes No
Step 1
aMove the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions
for the paper loaded.
bResend the print job.
Is the page or image clipped?
Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
Troubleshooting 274
Action Yes No
Step 2
From the printer control panel, set the paper size and type in the Paper
menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Do the paper size and type match the paper loaded in the tray?
Go to step 3. Do one or more of the
following:
•Specify the paper
size from the tray
settings to match
the paper loaded in
the tray.
•Change the paper
loaded in the tray
to match the paper
size specified in the
tray settings.
Step 3
aDepending on your operating system, specify the paper size from
Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
bResend the print job.
Is the page or image clipped?
Go to step 4. The problem is solved.
Step 4
aReinstall the imaging unit.
1Remove the toner cartridge.
2Remove the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to
direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to
light may cause print quality problems.
3Install the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
bResend the print job.
Is the page or image clipped?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is solved.
Compressed images appear on prints
Note: Printing on letter-size paper using a 220-volt fuser compresses images.
Action Yes No
Step 1
aMake sure the size of the paper loaded in the tray matches the fuser
type.
Note: Use a 110-volt fuser for printing on letter-size paper and a
220-volt fuser for printing on A4‑size paper.
bResend the print job.
Do compressed images still appear?
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Troubleshooting 275
Action Yes No
Step 2
aReplace the fuser. For more information on installing the fuser, see
the instruction sheet that came with the part.
bResend the print job.
Do compressed images still appear?
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
Gray background on prints
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Leading edge
Trailing edge
Action Yes No
Step 1
aFrom the Quality Menu on the printer control panel, decrease the
toner darkness.
Note: 8 is the factory default setting.
bResend the print job.
Did the gray background disappear from the prints?
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Step 2
Reinstall the imaging unit and the toner cartridge.
aRemove the toner cartridge.
bRemove the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to
direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to light
can cause print quality problems.
cInstall the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
dResend the print job.
Did the gray background disappear from the prints?
The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
Step 3
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Did the gray background disappear from the prints?
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
Troubleshooting 276
Horizontal voids appear on prints
Leading edge
Trailing edge
Action Yes No
Step 1
aMake sure your software program is using a correct fill pattern.
bResend the print job.
Do horizontal voids appear on prints?
Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
Step 2
aLoad the specified tray or feeder with a recommended type of paper.
bResend the print job.
Do horizontal voids appear on prints?
Go to step 3. The problem is solved.
Step 3
aRedistribute the toner in the imaging unit.
1Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.
2Firmly shake the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to
direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to
light may cause print quality problems.
3Reinstall the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
bResend the print job.
Do horizontal voids appear on prints?
Go to step 4. The problem is solved.
Step 4
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Do horizontal voids appear on prints?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is solved.
Troubleshooting 277
Incorrect margins on prints
ABC
DEF
ABC
DEF
Action Yes No
Step 1
aMove the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions
for the paper size loaded.
bResend the print job.
Are the margins correct?
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Step 2
From the printer control panel, set the paper size in the Paper menu to
match the paper loaded in the tray.
Does the paper size match the paper loaded in the tray?
Go to step 3. Do one or more of the
following:
•Specify the paper
size from the tray
settings to match
the paper loaded in
the tray.
•Change the paper
loaded in the tray
to match the paper
size specified in the
tray settings.
Step 3
aDepending on your operating system, specify the paper size from
Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
bResend the print job.
Are the margins correct?
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
Troubleshooting 278
Paper curl
Action Yes No
Step 1
Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions for
the size of the paper loaded.
Are the width and length guides positioned correctly?
Go to step 2. Adjust the width and
length guides.
Step 2
From the printer control panel, set the paper type and weight in the Paper
menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Do the paper type and weight match the type and weight of the paper in
the tray?
Go to step 3. Specify the paper type
and weight from the
tray settings to match
the paper loaded in the
tray.
Step 3
aDepending on your operating system, specify the paper type and
weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
bResend the print job.
Is the paper still curled?
Go to step 4. The problem is solved.
Step 4
aRemove the paper from the tray, and then turn it over.
bResend the print job.
Is the paper still curled?
Go to step 5. The problem is solved.
Step 5
aLoad paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in
its original wrapper until you use it.
bResend the print job.
Is the paper still curled?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is solved.
Print irregularities
) )
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Leading edge
Trailing edge
Troubleshooting 279
Action Yes No
Step 1
aMove the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions
for the size of the paper loaded in the tray.
bResend the print job.
Do print irregularities still appear?
Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
Step 2
From the printer control panel, set the paper size and type in the Paper
menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Do the printer settings match the type and weight of the paper loaded in
the tray?
Go to step 3. Specify the paper size
and type from the tray
settings to match the
paper loaded in the
tray.
Step 3
aDepending on your operating system, specify the paper type and
weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
bResend the print job.
Do print irregularities still appear?
Go to step 4. The problem is solved.
Step 4
Check if the paper loaded in the tray has texture or rough finishes.
Are you printing on textured or rough paper?
From the printer
control panel, set the
paper texture in the
Paper menu to match
the paper loaded in the
tray.
Go to step 5.
Step 5
aLoad paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in
its original wrapper until you use it.
bResend the print job.
Do print irregularities still appear?
Go to step 6. The problem is solved.
Step 6
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Do print irregularities still appear?
Contact customer
support at
http://support.lexmar
k.com or your service
representative.
The problem is solved.
Troubleshooting 280
Print is too dark
ABC
DEF
ABC
DEF
Action Yes No
Step 1
aFrom the Quality menu on the printer control panel, reduce the toner
darkness.
Note: 8 is the factory default setting.
bResend the print job.
Is the print still too dark?
Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
Step 2
aFrom the printer control panel, set the paper type, texture and weight
in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
bResend the print job.
Is the tray set to the type, texture, and weight of the paper loaded?
Go to step 3. Do one or more of the
following:
•Specify the paper
type, texture, and
weight from the
tray settings to
match the paper
loaded in the tray.
•Change the paper
loaded in the tray
to match the paper
type, texture and
weight specified in
the tray settings.
Step 3
aDepending on your operating system, specify the paper type, texture
and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
bResend the print job.
Is the print still too dark?
Go to step 4. The problem is solved.
Step 4
Check if the paper loaded in the tray has texture or rough finishes.
Are you printing on textured or rough paper?
From the printer
control panel, change
the texture settings in
the Paper Texture
menu to match the
paper you are printing
on.
Go to step 5.
Troubleshooting 281
Action Yes No
Step 5
aLoad paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in
its original wrapper until you use it.
bResend the print job.
Is the print still too dark?
Go to step 6. The problem is solved.
Step 6
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Is the print still too dark?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is solved.
Print is too light
ABC
DEF
Action Yes No
Step 1
aFrom the Quality menu on the printer control panel, increase the toner
darkness.
Note: 8 is the factory default setting.
bResend the print job.
Is the print still too light?
Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
Step 2
From the printer control panel, set the paper type, texture, and weight in
the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Is the tray set to the type, texture, and weight of the paper loaded?
Go to step 3. Change the paper type,
texture, and weight to
match the paper
loaded in the tray.
Step 3
aDepending on your operating system, specify the paper type, texture,
and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
bResend the print job.
Is the print still too light?
Go to step 4. The problem is solved.
Troubleshooting 282
Action Yes No
Step 4
Make sure that the paper has no texture or rough finishes.
Are you printing on textured or rough paper?
From the printer
control panel, change
the texture settings in
the Paper Texture
menu to match the
paper you are printing
on.
Go to step 5.
Step 5
aLoad paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in
its original wrapper until you use it.
bResend the print job.
Is the print still too light?
Go to step 6. The problem is solved.
Step 6
aRedistribute the toner in the imaging unit.
1Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.
2Firmly shake the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to
direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to
light may cause print quality problems.
3Install the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
bResend the print job.
Is the print still too light?
Go to step 7. The problem is solved.
Step 7
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Is the print still too light?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is solved.
Printer is printing blank pages
Troubleshooting 283
Action Yes No
Step 1
aCheck if there is packing material left on the imaging unit.
1Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.
2Check if the packing material is properly removed from the imaging
unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to
direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to
light may cause print quality problems.
3Reinstall the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
bResend the print job.
Is the printer still printing blank pages?
Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
Step 2
aRedistribute the toner in the imaging unit.
1Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.
2Firmly shake the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to
direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to
light may cause print quality problems.
3Reinstall the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
bResend the print job.
Is the printer still printing blank pages?
Go to step 3. The problem is solved.
Step 3
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Is the printer still printing blank pages?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is solved.
Printer is printing solid black pages
Troubleshooting 284
Action Yes No
Step 1
aReinstall the imaging unit.
1Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to
direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to
light may cause print quality problems.
2Install the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
bResend the print job.
Is the printer printing solid black pages?
Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
Step 2
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Is the printer printing solid black pages?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is solved.
Repeating defects appear on prints
))
)
))
)
Action Yes No
Step 1
aReplace the imaging unit if the distance between the defects is equal
to any of the following:
•47.8 mm (1.88 in.)
•96.8 mm (3.81 in.)
•28.5 mm (1.12 in.)
bResend the print job.
Do repeating defects still appear on prints?
Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
Step 2
aReplace the fuser if the distance between the defects is equal to either
of the following:
•94.25 mm (3.71 in.)
•95.2 mm (3.75 in.)
bResend the print job.
Do repeating defects still appear on prints?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is solved.
Troubleshooting 285
Shadow images appear on prints
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
Leading edge
Trailing edge
Action Yes No
Step 1
Load paper with the correct paper type and weight in the tray.
Is paper with the correct paper type and weight loaded in the tray?
Go to step 2. Load paper with the
correct paper type and
weight in the tray.
Step 2
From the printer control panel, set the paper type and weight in the Paper
menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Is the tray set to the type and weight of the paper loaded?
Go to step 3. Change the paper
loaded in the tray to
match the paper type
and weight specified in
the tray settings.
Step 3
aDepending on your operating system, specify the paper type and
weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
bResend the print job.
Do shadow images still appear on prints?
Go to step 4. The problem is solved.
Step 4
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Do shadow images still appear on prints?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is solved.
Skewed print
) )
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Troubleshooting 286
Action Yes No
Step 1
aMove the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions
for the size of the paper loaded.
bResend the print job.
Is the print still skewed?
Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
Step 2
aCheck if you are printing on a paper that is supported by the tray.
bResend the print job.
Is the print still skewed?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is solved.
Streaked horizontal lines appear on prints
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Action Yes No
Step 1
aDepending on your operating system, specify the tray or feeder from
Printing Preferences or the Print dialog.
bResend the print job.
Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints?
Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
Step 2
From the printer control panel, set the paper type and weight in the Paper
menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Do the paper type and weight match the type and weight of the paper in
the tray?
Go to step 3. Change the paper type
and weight to match
the paper loaded in the
tray.
Step 3
aLoad paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in
its original wrapper until you use it.
bResend the print job.
Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints?
Go to step 4. The problem is solved.
Troubleshooting 287
Action Yes No
Step 4
aReinstall the imaging unit.
1Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to
direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to
light may cause print quality problems.
2Install the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
bResend the print job.
Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints?
Go to step 5. The problem is solved.
Step 5
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is solved.
Streaked vertical lines appear on prints
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Leading edge
Trailing edge
Action Yes No
Step 1
aDepending on your operating system, specify the paper type, texture,
and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
bResend the print job.
Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints?
Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
Step 2
From the printer control panel, set the paper texture, type, and weight in
the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Do the paper texture, type, and weight match the paper in the tray?
Go to step 3. Do one or more of the
following:
•Specify the paper
texture, type, and
weight from the
tray settings to
match the paper
loaded in the tray.
•Change the paper
loaded in the tray
to match the paper
texture, type, and
weight specified in
the tray settings.
Troubleshooting 288
Action Yes No
Step 3
aLoad paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in
its original wrapper until you use it.
bResend the print job.
Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints?
Go to step 4. The problem is solved.
Step 4
aReinstall the imaging unit.
1Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to
direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to
light may cause print quality problems.
2Install the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
bResend the print job.
Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints?
Go to step 5. The problem is solved.
Step 5
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints?
Contact customer
support at
http://support.lexmar
k.com or your service
representative.
The problem is solved.
Toner fog or background shading appears on prints
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Action Yes No
Step 1
aReinstall the imaging unit.
1Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to
direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to
light may cause print quality problems.
2Install the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
bResend the print job.
Did the toner fog or background shading disappear from the prints?
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Troubleshooting 289
Action Yes No
Step 2
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Did the toner fog or background shading disappear from the prints?
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
Toner rubs off
Leading edge
Trailing edge
ABC
DEF
Action Yes No
Step 1
From the Paper menu on the printer control panel, check the paper type
and weight.
Do the paper type and weight match the paper loaded in the tray?
Go to step 2. Specify the paper type
and weight from the
tray settings to match
the paper loaded in the
tray.
Step 2
Check if you are printing on paper with texture or rough finishes.
Are you printing on textured or rough paper?
From the Paper menu
on the printer control
panel, set the paper
texture.
Go to step 3.
Step 3
aFrom the Paper Weight menu on the printer control panel, set Heavy
Weight to Heavy.
bResend the print job.
Does the toner rub off?
Go to step 4. The problem is solved.
Step 4
aEnable Quiet mode.
From the printer control panel, navigate to:
Settings > General Settings > Quiet Mode > On
bResend the print job.
Does the toner rub off?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is solved.
Troubleshooting 290
Toner specks appear on prints
Action Yes No
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Do toner specks appear on prints?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is solved.
Transparency print quality is poor
Action Yes No
Step 1
From the printer control panel, set the paper type in the Paper menu to
match the paper loaded in the tray.
Is the paper type for the tray set to Transparency?
Go to step 2. Set the paper type to
Transparency.
Step 2
aCheck if you are using a recommended type of transparency.
bResend the print job.
Is the print quality still poor?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is solved.
Uneven print density
Action Yes No
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Is the print density uneven?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is solved.
Vertical voids appear on prints
Leading edge
Trailing edge
Troubleshooting 291
Action Yes No
Step 1
aMake sure your software program is using a correct fill pattern.
bResend the print job.
Do vertical voids appear on prints?
Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
Step 2
aFrom the printer control panel, set the paper type and weight in the
Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
bResend the print job.
Do vertical voids appear on prints?
Go to step 3. The problem is solved.
Step 3
Check if you are using a recommended type of paper.
aLoad the specified tray or feeder with a recommended type of paper.
bResend the print job.
Do vertical voids appear on prints?
Go to step 4. The problem is solved.
Step 4
aRedistribute the toner in the imaging unit.
1Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.
2Firmly shake the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to
direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to
light may cause print quality problems.
3Reinstall the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
bResend the print job.
Do vertical voids appear on prints?
Go to step 5. The problem is solved.
Step 5
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Do vertical voids appear on prints?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is solved.
Troubleshooting 292
Solving home screen applications problems
An application error has occurred
Action Yes No
Step 1
Check the system log for relevant details.
aOpen a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the
address field.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then you can:
•View the IP address on the printer home screen.
•Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages, and then
locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by
periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
bClick Settings > Apps > Apps Management > System tab > Log.
cFrom the Filter menu, select an application status.
dFrom the Application menu, select an application, and then click
Submit.
Does an error message appear in the log?
Go to step 2. Contact customer
support.
Step 2
Resolve the error.
Is the application working now?
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
Embedded Web Server does not open
Action Yes No
Step 1
Make sure the printer IP address is correct.
View the printer IP address:
•From the printer home screen
•From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu
•By printing a network setup page or menu settings page, and then
finding the TCP/IP section
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by
periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
Is the printer IP address correct?
Go to step 2. Type the correct
printer IP address in the
address field of your
Web browser.
Note: Depending on
the network settings,
you may need to type
“https://” instead of
“http://” before the
printer IP address to
access the Embedded
Web Server.
Step 2
Check if the printer is turned on.
Is the printer turned on?
Go to step 3. Turn on the printer.
Troubleshooting 293
Action Yes No
Step 3
Check if the network connection is working.
Is the network connection working?
Go to step 4. Contact your system
support person.
Step 4
Make sure the cable connections to the printer and print server are secure.
For more information, see the setup documentation that came with
the printer.
Are the cable connections to the printer and print server secure?
Go to step 5. Tighten the cable
connection.
Step 5
Temporarily disable the Web proxy servers.
Note: Proxy servers may block or restrict you from accessing certain
Web sites including the Embedded Web Server.
Are the Web proxy servers disabled?
Go to step 6. Contact your system
support person.
Step 6
Access the Embedded Web Server again by typing the correct IP address
in the address field.
Did the Embedded Web Server open?
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
Contacting customer support
When you contact customer support, you will need to be able to describe the problem you are experiencing, the message
on the printer display, and the troubleshooting steps you have already taken to find a solution.
You need to know your printer model type and serial number. For more information, see the label at the back of the
printer. The serial number is also listed on the menu settings page.
Lexmark has various ways to help you solve your printing problem. Visit the Lexmark Web site at
http://support.lexmark.com, and then select one of the following:
Tech Library You can browse our library of manuals, support documentation, drivers, and other downloads to help you
solve common problems.
E-mail You can send an e-mail to the Lexmark team, describing your problem. A service representative will respond
and provide you with information to solve your problem.
Live chat You can chat directly with a service representative. They can work with you to solve your printer problem or
provide assistance through Assisted Service where the service representative can remotely connect to your
computer through the Internet to troubleshoot problems, install updates, or complete other tasks to help
you successfully use your Lexmark product.
Telephone support is also available. In the U.S. or Canada, call 1-800-539-6275. For other countries or regions, visit
http://support.lexmark.com.
Troubleshooting 294
Notices
Product information
Product name:
Lexmark M5155, M5163 and M5170
Machine type:
4063
Model(s):
29E, 49E, 69E
Edition notice
September 2012
The following paragraph does not apply to any country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law:
LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL, INC., PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain
transactions; therefore, this statement may not apply to you.
This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically made to the
information herein; these changes will be incorporated in later editions. Improvements or changes in the products or
the programs described may be made at any time.
References in this publication to products, programs, or services do not imply that the manufacturer intends to make
these available in all countries in which it operates. Any reference to a product, program, or service is not intended to
state or imply that only that product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product, program,
or service that does not infringe any existing intellectual property right may be used instead. Evaluation and verification
of operation in conjunction with other products, programs, or services, except those expressly designated by the
manufacturer, are the user’s responsibility.
For Lexmark technical support, visit http://support.lexmark.com.
For information on supplies and downloads, visit www.lexmark.com.
© 2012
All rights reserved.
GOVERNMENT END USERS
The Software Program and any related documentation are "Commercial Items," as that term is defined in 48 C.F.R.
2.101, "Computer Software" and "Commercial Computer Software Documentation," as such terms are used in 48 C.F.R.
12.212 or 48 C.F.R. 227.7202, as applicable. Consistent with 48 C.F.R. 12.212 or 48 C.F.R. 227.7202-1 through 227.7207-4,
as applicable, the Commercial Computer Software and Commercial Software Documentation are licensed to the U.S.
Government end users (a) only as Commerical Items and (b) with only those rights as are granted to all other end users
pursuant to the terms and conditions herein.
Notices 295
Trademarks
Lexmark, Lexmark with diamond design, MarkNet, and MarkVision are trademarks of Lexmark International, Inc.,
registered in the United States and/or other countries.
Mac and the Mac logo are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
PCL® is a registered trademark of the Hewlett-Packard Company. PCL is Hewlett-Packard Company’s designation of a
set of printer commands (language) and functions included in its printer products. This printer is intended to be
compatible with the PCL language. This means the printer recognizes PCL commands used in various application
programs, and that the printer emulates the functions corresponding to the commands.
The following terms are trademarks or registered trademarks of these companies:
Albertus The Monotype Corporation plc
Antique Olive Monsieur Marcel OLIVE
Apple-Chancery Apple Computer, Inc.
Arial The Monotype Corporation plc
CG Times Based on Times New Roman under license from The Monotype Corporation plc, is a product of
Agfa Corporation
Chicago Apple Computer, Inc.
Clarendon Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
Eurostile Nebiolo
Geneva Apple Computer, Inc.
GillSans The Monotype Corporation plc
Helvetica Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
Hoefler Jonathan Hoefler Type Foundry
ITC Avant Garde Gothic International Typeface Corporation
ITC Bookman International Typeface Corporation
ITC Mona Lisa International Typeface Corporation
ITC Zapf Chancery International Typeface Corporation
Joanna The Monotype Corporation plc
Marigold Arthur Baker
Monaco Apple Computer, Inc.
New York Apple Computer, Inc.
Oxford Arthur Baker
Palatino Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
Stempel Garamond Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
Taffy Agfa Corporation
Times New Roman The Monotype Corporation plc
Univers Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
Notices 296
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Licensing notices
All licensing notices associated with this product can be viewed from the root directory of the documentation CD.
Noise emission levels
The following measurements were made in accordance with ISO 7779 and reported in conformance with ISO 9296.
Note: Some modes may not apply to your product.
1-meter average sound pressure, dBA
Printing M5155: 57 dBA; M5163: 58 dBA; M5170:
58 dBA
Ready 32 dBA for all models
Values are subject to change. See www.lexmark.com for current values.
EU waste electronics information
The WEEE logo signifies specific recycling programs and procedures for electronic products in countries of the European
Union. We encourage the recycling of our products.
If you have further questions about recycling options, click EU Waste Electronics Information.
Product disposal
Do not dispose of the printer or supplies in the same manner as normal household waste. Consult your local authorities
for disposal and recycling options.
Static sensitivity notice
Notices 297
This symbol identifies static-sensitive parts. Do not touch in the areas near these symbols without first touching the
metal frame of the printer.
ENERGY STAR
Any Lexmark product bearing the ENERGY STAR emblem on the product or on a start-up screen is certified to comply
with Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) ENERGY STAR requirements as configured when shipped by Lexmark.
Temperature information
Ambient temperature 15.6 to 32.2°C (60 to 90°F)
Shipping and storage temperature 1 to 35°C (34 to 95°F)
Laser notice
The printer is certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR Chapter I, Subchapter J for Class I
(1) laser products, and elsewhere is certified as a Class I laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 60825-1.
Class I laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The printer contains internally a Class IIIb (3b) laser that is
nominally a 10 milliwatt gallium arsenide laser operating in the wavelength of 787-800 nanometers. The laser system
and printer are designed so there is never any human access to laser radiation above a Class I level during normal
operation, user maintenance, or prescribed service condition.
Laser advisory label
A laser notice label may be affixed to this printer as shown:
Notices 298
DANGER - Invisible laser radiation when cartridges are removed and interlock defeated. Avoid exposure to laser beam.
PERIGO - Radiação a laser invisível será liberada se os cartuchos forem removidos e o lacre rompido. Evite a exposição aos feixes de laser.
Opasnost - Nevidljivo lasersko zračenje kada su kasete uklonjene i poništena sigurnosna veza. Izbjegavati izlaganje zracima.
NEBEZPEČÍ - Když jsou vyjmuty kazety a je odblokována pojistka, ze zařízení je vysíláno neviditelné laserové záření. Nevystavujte se působení laserového paprsku.
FARE - Usynlig laserstråling, når patroner fjernes, og spærreanordningen er slået fra. Undgå at blive udsat for laserstrålen.
GEVAAR - Onzichtbare laserstraling wanneer cartridges worden verwijderd en een vergrendeling wordt genegeerd. Voorkom blootstelling aan de laser.
DANGER - Rayonnements laser invisibles lors du retrait des cartouches et du déverrouillage des loquets. Eviter toute exposition au rayon laser.
VAARA - Näkymätöntä lasersäteilyä on varottava, kun värikasetit on poistettu ja lukitus on auki. Vältä lasersäteelle altistumista.
GEFAHR - Unsichtbare Laserstrahlung beim Herausnehmen von Druckkassetten und offener Sicherheitssperre. Laserstrahl meiden.
ΚΙΝΔΥΝΟΣ - Έκλυση αόρατης ακτινοβολίας laser κατά την αφαίρεση των κασετών και την απασφάλιση της μανδάλωσης. Αποφεύγετε την έκθεση στην ακτινοβολία laser.
VESZÉLY – Nem látható lézersugárzás fordulhat elő a patronok eltávolításakor és a zárószerkezet felbontásakor. Kerülje a lézersugárnak való kitettséget.
PERICOLO - Emissione di radiazioni laser invisibili durante la rimozione delle cartucce e del blocco. Evitare l´esposizione al raggio laser.
FARE – Usynlig laserstråling når kassettene tas ut og sperren er satt ut av spill. Unngå eksponering for laserstrålen.
NIEBEZPIECZEŃSTWO - niewidzialne promieniowanie laserowe podczas usuwania kaset i blokady. Należy unikać naświetlenia promieniem lasera.
ОПАСНО! Невидимое лазерное излучение при извлеченных картриджах и снятии блокировки. Избегайте воздействия лазерных лучей.
Pozor – Nebezpečenstvo neviditeľného laserového žiarenia pri odobratých kazetách a odblokovanej poistke. Nevystavujte sa lúčom.
PELIGRO: Se producen radiaciones láser invisibles al extraer los cartuchos con el interbloqueo desactivado. Evite la exposición al haz de láser.
FARA – Osynlig laserstrålning när patroner tas ur och spärrmekanismen är upphävd. Undvik exponering för laserstrålen.
危险 - 当移除碳粉盒及互锁失效时会产生看不见的激光辐射，请避免暴露在激光光束下。
危險 - 移除碳粉匣與安全連續開關失效時會產生看不見的雷射輻射。請避免曝露在雷射光束下。
危険 - カートリッジが取り外され、内部ロックが無効になると、見えないレーザー光が放射されます。 このレーザー光に当たらないようにしてください。
Power consumption
Product power consumption
The following table documents the power consumption characteristics of the product.
Note: Some modes may not apply to your product.
Mode Description Power consumption (Watts)
Printing The product is generating hard‑copy output from electronic
inputs.
M5155: 700 W; M5163: 800 W; M5170:
830 W
Copy The product is generating hard‑copy output from hard‑copy
original documents.
N/A
Scan The product is scanning hard‑copy documents. N/A
Ready The product is waiting for a print job. 60 W (Ready 1), 30 W (Ready 2)
Sleep Mode The product is in a high‑level energy‑saving mode. M5155: 5.5 W; M5163: 5.5 W; M5170: 8
W
Hibernate The product is in a low‑level energy‑saving mode. 0.5W
Off The product is plugged into an electrical outlet, but the power
switch is turned off.
0.1 W
The power consumption levels listed in the previous table represent time-averaged measurements. Instantaneous
power draws may be substantially higher than the average.
Values are subject to change. See www.lexmark.com for current values.
Notices 299
Sleep Mode
This product is designed with an energy-saving mode called Sleep Mode. The Sleep Mode saves energy by lowering
power consumption during extended periods of inactivity. The Sleep Mode is automatically engaged after this product
is not used for a specified period of time, called the Sleep Mode Timeout.
Factory default Sleep Mode Timeout for this product (in minutes): 30
By using the configuration menus, the Sleep Mode Timeout can be modified between 1 minute and 180 minutes. Setting
the Sleep Mode Timeout to a low value reduces energy consumption, but may increase the response time of the product.
Setting the Sleep Mode Timeout to a high value maintains a fast response, but uses more energy.
Hibernate Mode
This product is designed with an ultra‑low power operating mode called Hibernate mode. When operating in Hibernate
Mode, all other systems and devices are powered down safely.
The Hibernate mode can be entered in any of the following methods:
•Using the Hibernate Timeout
•Using the Schedule Power modes
•Using the Sleep/Hibernate button
Factory default Hibernate Timeout for this product in all countries or regions except for EU countries and
Switzerland
Disabled
Factory default value for this product in EU countries or regions and Switzerland 3 days
The amount of time the printer waits after a job is printed before it enters Hibernate mode can be modified between
one hour and one month.
Off mode
If this product has an off mode which still consumes a small amount of power, then to completely stop product power
consumption, disconnect the power supply cord from the electrical outlet.
Total energy usage
It is sometimes helpful to calculate the total product energy usage. Since power consumption claims are provided in
power units of Watts, the power consumption should be multiplied by the time the product spends in each mode in
order to calculate energy usage. The total product energy usage is the sum of each mode's energy usage.
STATEMENT OF LIMITED WARRANTY FOR LEXMARK LASER PRINTERS,
LEXMARK LED PRINTERS, AND LEXMARK MULTIFUNCTION LASER PRINTERS
Lexmark International, Inc., Lexington, KY
This limited warranty applies to the United States and Canada. For customers outside the U.S., refer to the country-
specific warranty information that came with your product.
Notices 300
This limited warranty applies to this product only if it was originally purchased for your use, and not for resale, from
Lexmark or a Lexmark Remarketer, referred to in this statement as “Remarketer.”
Limited warranty
Lexmark warrants that this product:
—Is manufactured from new parts, or new and serviceable used parts, which perform like new parts
—Is, during normal use, free from defects in material and workmanship
If this product does not function as warranted during the warranty period, contact a Remarketer or Lexmark for repair
or replacement (at Lexmark's option).
If this product is a feature or option, this statement applies only when that feature or option is used with the product
for which it was intended. To obtain warranty service, you may be required to present the feature or option with the
product.
If you transfer this product to another user, warranty service under the terms of this statement is available to that user
for the remainder of the warranty period. You should transfer proof of original purchase and this statement to that
user.
Limited warranty service
The warranty period starts on the date of original purchase as shown on the purchase receipt and ends 12 months later
provided that the warranty period for any supplies and for any maintenance items included with the printer shall end
earlier if it, or its original contents, are substantially used up, depleted, or consumed. Fuser Units, Transfer/Transport
Units, Paper Feed items, if any, and any other items for which a Maintenance Kit is available are substantially consumed
when the printer displays a “Life Warning” or “Scheduled Maintenance” message for such item.
To obtain warranty service you may be required to present proof of original purchase. You may be required to deliver
your product to the Remarketer or Lexmark, or ship it prepaid and suitably packaged to a Lexmark designated location.
You are responsible for loss of, or damage to, a product in transit to the Remarketer or the Lexmark designated location.
When warranty service involves the exchange of a product or part, the item replaced becomes the property of the
Remarketer or Lexmark. The replacement may be a new or repaired item.
The replacement item assumes the remaining warranty period of the original product.
Replacement is not available to you if the product you present for exchange is defaced, altered, in need of a repair not
included in warranty service, damaged beyond repair, or if the product is not free of all legal obligations, restrictions,
liens, and encumbrances.
As part of your warranty service and/or replacement, Lexmark may update the firmware in your printer to the latest
version. Firmware updates may modify printer settings and cause counterfeit and/or unauthorized products, supplies,
parts, materials (such as toners and inks), software, or interfaces to stop working. Authorized use of genuine Lexmark
products will not be impacted.
Before you present this product for warranty service, remove all print cartridges, programs, data, and removable storage
media (unless directed otherwise by Lexmark).
For further explanation of your warranty alternatives and the nearest Lexmark authorized servicer in your area contact
Lexmark on the World Wide Web.
Remote technical support is provided for this product throughout its warranty period. For products no longer covered
by a Lexmark warranty, technical support may not be available or only be available for a fee.
Notices 301
Extent of limited warranty
Lexmark does not warrant uninterrupted or error-free operation of any product or the durability or longevity of prints
produced by any product.
Warranty service does not include repair of failures caused by:
—Modification or unauthorized attachments
—Accidents, misuse, abuse or use inconsistent with Lexmark user’s guides, manuals, instructions or guidance
—Unsuitable physical or operating environment
—Maintenance by anyone other than Lexmark or a Lexmark authorized servicer
—Operation of a product beyond the limit of its duty cycle
—Use of printing media outside of Lexmark specifications
—Refurbishment, repair, refilling or remanufacture by a third party of products, supplies or parts
—Products, supplies, parts, materials (such as toners and inks), software, or interfaces not furnished by Lexmark
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NEITHER LEXMARK NOR ITS THIRD PARTY SUPPLIERS OR
REMARKETERS MAKE ANY OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF ANY KIND, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WITH
RESPECT TO THIS PRODUCT, AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND SATISFACTORY QUALITY. ANY WARRANTIES THAT
MAY NOT BE DISCLAIMED UNDER APPLICABLE LAW ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE WARRANTY PERIOD. NO
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WILL APPLY AFTER THIS PERIOD. ALL INFORMATION, SPECIFICATIONS, PRICES,
AND SERVICES ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE AT ANY TIME WITHOUT NOTICE.
Limitation of liability
Your sole remedy under this limited warranty is set forth in this document. For any claim concerning performance or
nonperformance of Lexmark or a Remarketer for this product under this limited warranty, you may recover actual
damages up to the limit set forth in the following paragraph.
Lexmark's liability for actual damages from any cause whatsoever will be limited to the amount you paid for the product
that caused the damages. This limitation of liability will not apply to claims by you for bodily injury or damage to real
property or tangible personal property for which Lexmark is legally liable. IN NO EVENT WILL LEXMARK BE LIABLE FOR
ANY LOST PROFITS, LOST SAVINGS, INCIDENTAL DAMAGE, OR OTHER ECONOMIC OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES.
This is true even if you advise Lexmark or a Remarketer of the possibility of such damages. Lexmark is not liable for any
claim by you based on a third party claim.
This limitation of remedies also applies to claims against any Suppliers and Remarketers of Lexmark. Lexmark's and its
Suppliers' and Remarketers' limitations of remedies are not cumulative. Such Suppliers and Remarketers are intended
beneficiaries of this limitation.
Additional rights
Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, or do not allow the exclusion or limitation
of incidental or consequential damages, so the limitations or exclusions contained above may not apply to you.
This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may also have other rights that vary from state to state.
Notices 302
Modular component notice
This product may contain the following modular component(s):
Lexmark Regulatory Type/LEX-M01-005; FCC ID: IYLLEXM01005; Industry Canada IC: 2376A-M01005
Patent acknowledgment
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Elliptic Curve Cryptography (ECC) Cipher Suites for Transport
Layer Security (TLS) implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for TLS Elliptic Curve Cipher Suites with SHA-256/382 and AES Galois
Counter Mode (GCM) implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for TLS Suite B Profile for Transport Layer Security (TLS) implemented
in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Addition of the Camellia Cipher Suites to Transport Layer Security
(TLS) implemented in the product or service.
The use of certain patents in this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the
Intellectual Property Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for AES-CCM ECC Cipher Suites for TLS
implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for IKE and IKEv2 Authentication Using the Eliptic Curve Digital
Signature Algorithm (ECDSA) implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Suite B Cryptographic Suites for IPSec implemented in the
product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Algorithms for Internet Key Exchange version 1 (IKEv1)
implemented in the product or service.
Multiple model information
The following information applies to all M5155 and M5163 models except for the M5170 model.
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) compliance information statement
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
The FCC Class B limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment
is operated in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and,
if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
Notices 303
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause
harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on,
the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
•Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
•Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
•Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
•Consult your point of purchase or service representative for additional suggestions.
The manufacturer is not responsible for radio or television interference caused by using other than recommended
cables or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could
void the user's authority to operate this equipment.
Note: To assure compliance with FCC regulations on electromagnetic interference for a Class B computing device,
use a properly shielded and grounded cable such as Lexmark part number 1021231 for parallel attach or 1021294 for
USB attach. Use of a substitute cable not properly shielded and grounded may result in a violation of FCC
regulations.
Any questions regarding this compliance information statement should be directed to:
Director of Lexmark Technology & Services
Lexmark International, Inc.
740 West New Circle Road
Lexington, KY 40550
(859) 232–3000
Industry Canada compliance statement
This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Standard
ICES-003.
Avis de conformité aux normes de l’industrie du Canada
Cet appareil numérique de classe B est conforme aux exigences de la norme canadienne relative aux équipements
pouvant causer des interférences NMB-003.
European Community (EC) directives conformity
This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC, 2006/95/EC and
2009/125/EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic
compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits and the ecodesign of energy-
related products.
The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA.
The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium
Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY, A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon
request from the Authorized Representative.
This product satisfies the Class B limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950.
Notices 304
Regulatory notices for wireless products
This section contains the following regulatory information pertaining to wireless products that contain transmitters,
for example, but not limited to, wireless network cards or proximity card readers.
Exposure to radio frequency radiation
The radiated output power of this device is far below the radio frequency exposure limits of the FCC and other regulatory
agencies. A minimum separation of 20 cm (8 inches) must be maintained between the antenna and any persons for
this device to satisfy the RF exposure requirements of the FCC and other regulatory agencies.
Industry Canada (Canada)
This device complies with Industry Canada specification RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that
may cause undesired operation of the device.
This device has been designed to operate only with the antenna provided. Use of any other antenna is strictly prohibited
per regulations of Industry Canada.
To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from
windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to
licensing.
The installer of this radio equipment must ensure that the antenna is located or pointed such that it does not emit RF
fields in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population; consult Safety Code 6, obtainable from Health
Canada's Web site www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb.
The term "IC:" before the certification/registration number only signifies that the Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
Industry Canada (Canada)
Cet appareil est conforme à la norme RSS-210 d'Industry Canada. Son fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions
suivantes :
(1) cet appareil ne doit pas provoquer d'interférences et (2) il doit accepter toute interférence reçue, y compris celles
risquant d'altérer son fonctionnement.
Cet appareil a été conçu pour fonctionner uniquement avec l'antenne fournie. L'utilisation de toute autre antenne est
strictement interdite par la réglementation d'Industry Canada.
En application des réglementations d'Industry Canada, l'utilisation d'une antenne de gain supérieur est strictement
interdite.
Pour empêcher toute interférence radio au service faisant l'objet d'une licence, cet appareil doit être utilisé à l'intérieur
et loin des fenêtres afin de garantir une protection optimale.
Si le matériel (ou son antenne d'émission) est installé à l'extérieur, il doit faire l'objet d'une licence.
L'installateur de cet équipement radio doit veiller à ce que l'antenne soit implantée et dirigée de manière à n'émettre
aucun champ HF dépassant les limites fixées pour l'ensemble de la population par Santé Canada. Reportez-vous au
Code de sécurité 6 que vous pouvez consulter sur le site Web de Santé Canada www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb.
Notices 305
Le terme « IC » précédant le numéro de d'accréditation/inscription signifie simplement que le produit est conforme
aux spécifications techniques d'Industry Canada.
Notice to users in the European Union
This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC, 2006/95/EC,
1999/5/EC, and 2009/125/EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to
electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits, radio
equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and on the ecodesign of energy-related products.
Compliance is indicated by the CE marking.
The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA.
The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium
Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY, A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon
request from the Authorized Representative.
This product satisfies the Class B limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950.
Products equipped with 2.4GHz Wireless LAN option are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council
directives 2004/108/EC, 2006/95/EC, 1999/5/EC, and 2009/125/EC on the approximation and harmonization of the
laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use
within certain voltage limits and on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and on the ecodesign
of energy-related products.
Compliance is indicated by the CE marking.
Operation is allowed in all EU and EFTA countries, but is restricted to indoor use only.
The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA.
The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium
Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY, A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon
request from the Authorized Representative.
This product may be used in the countries indicated in the table below.
AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE
EL ES FI FR HR HU IE IS IT
LI LT LU LV MT NL NO PL PT
RO SE SI SK TR UK
Notices 306
Česky Společnost Lexmark International, Inc. tímto prohlašuje, že výrobek tento výrobek je ve shodě se základními
požadavky a dalšími příslušnými ustanoveními směrnice 1999/5/ES.
Dansk Lexmark International, Inc. erklærer herved, at dette produkt overholder de væsentlige krav og øvrige relevante
krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
Deutsch Hiermit erklärt Lexmark International, Inc., dass sich das Gerät dieses Gerät in Übereinstimmung mit den
grundlegenden Anforderungen und den übrigen einschlägigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG
befindet.
Ελληνική ΜΕ ΤΗΝ ΠΑΡΟΥΣΑ Η LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL, INC. ΔΗΛΩΝΕΙ ΟΤΙ ΑΥΤΟ ΤΟ ΠΡΟΪΟΝ
ΣΥΜΜΟΡΦΩΝΕΤΑΙ ΠΡΟΣ ΤΙΣ ΟΥΣΙΩΔΕΙΣ ΑΠΑΙΤΗΣΕΙΣ ΚΑΙ ΤΙΣ ΛΟΙΠΕΣ ΣΧΕΤΙΚΕΣ ΔΙΑΤΑΞΕΙΣ
ΤΗΣ ΟΔΗΓΙΑΣ 1999/5/ΕΚ.
English Hereby, Lexmark International, Inc., declares that this type of equipment is in compliance with the
essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
Español Por medio de la presente, Lexmark International, Inc. declara que este producto cumple con los requisitos
esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE.
Eesti Käesolevaga kinnitab Lexmark International, Inc., et seade see toode vastab direktiivi 1999/5/EÜ
põhinõuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele muudele asjakohastele sätetele.
Suomi Lexmark International, Inc. vakuuttaa täten, että tämä tuote on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten
ja muiden sitä koskevien direktiivin ehtojen mukainen.
Français Par la présente, Lexmark International, Inc. déclare que l'appareil ce produit est conforme aux exigences
fondamentales et autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE.
Magyar Alulírott, Lexmark International, Inc. nyilatkozom, hogy a termék megfelel a vonatkozó alapvetõ
követelményeknek és az 1999/5/EC irányelv egyéb elõírásainak.
Íslenska Hér með lýsir Lexmark International, Inc. yfir því að þessi vara er í samræmi við grunnkröfur og aðrar
kröfur, sem gerðar eru í tilskipun 1999/5/EC.
Italiano Con la presente Lexmark International, Inc. dichiara che questo questo prodotto è conforme ai requisiti
essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE.
Latviski Ar šo Lexmark International, Inc. deklarē, ka šis izstrādājums atbilst Direktīvas 1999/5/EK būtiskajām
prasībām un citiem ar to saistītajiem noteikumiem.
LietuviųŠiuo Lexmark International, Inc. deklaruoja, kad šis produktas atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas
1999/5/EB direktyvos nuostatas.
Malti Bil-preżenti, Lexmark International, Inc., jiddikjara li dan il-prodott huwa konformi mal-ħtiġijiet
essenzjali u ma dispożizzjonijiet oħrajn relevanti li jinsabu fid-Direttiva 1999/5/KE.
Nederlands Hierbij verklaart Lexmark International, Inc. dat het toestel dit product in overeenstemming is met de essentiële
eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG.
Norsk Lexmark International, Inc. erklærer herved at dette produktet er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og
øvrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
Polski Niniejszym Lexmark International, Inc. oświadcza, że niniejszy produkt jest zgodny z zasadniczymi
wymogami oraz pozostałymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC.
Português A Lexmark International Inc. declara que este este produto está conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras
disposições da Diretiva 1999/5/CE.
Slovensky Lexmark International, Inc. týmto vyhlasuje, že tento produkt spĺňa základné požiadavky a všetky
príslušné ustanovenia smernice 1999/5/ES.
Notices 307
Slovensko Lexmark International, Inc. izjavlja, da je ta izdelek v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi
relevantnimi določili direktive 1999/5/ES.
Svenska Härmed intygar Lexmark International, Inc. att denna produkt står i överensstämmelse med de väsentliga
egenskapskrav och övriga relevanta bestämmelser som framgår av direktiv 1999/5/EG.
Model‑specific information
The following information applies only to the M5170 model.
Hibernate Mode
This product is designed with an ultra‑low power operating mode called Hibernate mode. When operating in Hibernate
Mode, all other systems and devices are powered down safely.
The Hibernate mode can be entered in any of the following methods:
•Using the Hibernate Timeout
•Using the Schedule Power modes
•Using the Sleep/Hibernate button
Factory default Hibernate Timeout Disabled
The amount of time the printer waits after a job is printed before it enters Hibernate mode can be modified between
one hour and one month.
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) compliance information statement
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
The FCC Class A limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment
is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy
and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case
the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other than recommended
cables or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could
void the user's authority to operate this equipment.
Note: To assure compliance with FCC regulations on electromagnetic interference for a Class A computing device,
use a properly shielded and grounded cable such as Lexmark part number 1021231 for parallel attach or 1021294 for
USB attach. Use of a substitute cable not properly shielded and grounded may result in a violation of FCC
regulations.
Industry Canada compliance statement
This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Standard
ICES-003.
Notices 308
Avis de conformité aux normes de l’industrie du Canada
Cet appareil numérique de classe A est conforme aux exigences de la norme canadienne relative aux équipements
pouvant causer des interférences NMB-003.
European Community (EC) directives conformity
This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC and 2006/95/EC
on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility
and safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits.
The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA.
The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium
Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY, A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon
request from the Authorized Representative.
This product satisfies the Class A limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950.
Radio interference notice
Warning
This is a product that complies with the emission requirements of EN55022 Class A limits and immunity requirements
of EN55024. This product is not intended to be used in residential/domestic environments.
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment, this product may cause radio interference, in which case the user
may be required to take adequate measures.
Regulatory notices for wireless products
This section contains the following regulatory information pertaining to wireless products that contain transmitters,
for example, but not limited to, wireless network cards or proximity card readers.
Exposure to radio frequency radiation
The radiated output power of this device is far below the radio frequency exposure limits of the FCC and other regulatory
agencies. A minimum separation of 20 cm (8 inches) must be maintained between the antenna and any persons for
this device to satisfy the RF exposure requirements of the FCC and other regulatory agencies.
Industry Canada (Canada)
This device complies with Industry Canada specification RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that
may cause undesired operation of the device.
This device has been designed to operate only with the antenna provided. Use of any other antenna is strictly prohibited
per regulations of Industry Canada.
Notices 309
To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from
windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to
licensing.
The installer of this radio equipment must ensure that the antenna is located or pointed such that it does not emit RF
fields in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population; consult Safety Code 6, obtainable from Health
Canada's Web site www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb.
The term "IC:" before the certification/registration number only signifies that the Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
Industry Canada (Canada)
Cet appareil est conforme à la norme RSS-210 d'Industry Canada. Son fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions
suivantes :
(1) cet appareil ne doit pas provoquer d'interférences et (2) il doit accepter toute interférence reçue, y compris celles
risquant d'altérer son fonctionnement.
Cet appareil a été conçu pour fonctionner uniquement avec l'antenne fournie. L'utilisation de toute autre antenne est
strictement interdite par la réglementation d'Industry Canada.
En application des réglementations d'Industry Canada, l'utilisation d'une antenne de gain supérieur est strictement
interdite.
Pour empêcher toute interférence radio au service faisant l'objet d'une licence, cet appareil doit être utilisé à l'intérieur
et loin des fenêtres afin de garantir une protection optimale.
Si le matériel (ou son antenne d'émission) est installé à l'extérieur, il doit faire l'objet d'une licence.
L'installateur de cet équipement radio doit veiller à ce que l'antenne soit implantée et dirigée de manière à n'émettre
aucun champ HF dépassant les limites fixées pour l'ensemble de la population par Santé Canada. Reportez-vous au
Code de sécurité 6 que vous pouvez consulter sur le site Web de Santé Canada www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb.
Le terme « IC » précédant le numéro de d'accréditation/inscription signifie simplement que le produit est conforme
aux spécifications techniques d'Industry Canada.
Notice to users in the European Union
Products bearing the CE mark are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC,
2006/95/EC, and 1999/5/EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to
electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits, and on
radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment.
Compliance is indicated by the CE marking.
The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA.
The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium
Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY, A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon
request from the Authorized Representative.
This product satisfies the Class A limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950.
Notices 310
Products equipped with 2.4GHz Wireless LAN option are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council
directives 2004/108/EC, 2006/95/EC, and 1999/5/EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the
Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain
voltage limits and on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment.
Compliance is indicated by the CE marking.
Operation is allowed in all EU and EFTA countries, but is restricted to indoor use only.
The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA.
The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium
Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY, A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon
request from the Authorized Representative.
This product may be used in the countries indicated in the table below.
AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE
EL ES FI FR HR HU IE IS IT
LI LT LU LV MT NL NO PL PT
RO SE SI SK TR UK
Česky Společnost Lexmark International, Inc. tímto prohlašuje, že výrobek tento výrobek je ve shodě se základními
požadavky a dalšími příslušnými ustanoveními směrnice 1999/5/ES.
Dansk Lexmark International, Inc. erklærer herved, at dette produkt overholder de væsentlige krav og øvrige relevante
krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
Deutsch Hiermit erklärt Lexmark International, Inc., dass sich das Gerät dieses Gerät in Übereinstimmung mit den
grundlegenden Anforderungen und den übrigen einschlägigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG
befindet.
Ελληνική ΜΕ ΤΗΝ ΠΑΡΟΥΣΑ Η LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL, INC. ΔΗΛΩΝΕΙ ΟΤΙ ΑΥΤΟ ΤΟ ΠΡΟΪΟΝ
ΣΥΜΜΟΡΦΩΝΕΤΑΙ ΠΡΟΣ ΤΙΣ ΟΥΣΙΩΔΕΙΣ ΑΠΑΙΤΗΣΕΙΣ ΚΑΙ ΤΙΣ ΛΟΙΠΕΣ ΣΧΕΤΙΚΕΣ ΔΙΑΤΑΞΕΙΣ
ΤΗΣ ΟΔΗΓΙΑΣ 1999/5/ΕΚ.
English Hereby, Lexmark International, Inc., declares that this type of equipment is in compliance with the
essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
Español Por medio de la presente, Lexmark International, Inc. declara que este producto cumple con los requisitos
esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE.
Eesti Käesolevaga kinnitab Lexmark International, Inc., et seade see toode vastab direktiivi 1999/5/EÜ
põhinõuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele muudele asjakohastele sätetele.
Suomi Lexmark International, Inc. vakuuttaa täten, että tämä tuote on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten
ja muiden sitä koskevien direktiivin ehtojen mukainen.
Français Par la présente, Lexmark International, Inc. déclare que l'appareil ce produit est conforme aux exigences
fondamentales et autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE.
Magyar Alulírott, Lexmark International, Inc. nyilatkozom, hogy a termék megfelel a vonatkozó alapvetõ
követelményeknek és az 1999/5/EC irányelv egyéb elõírásainak.
Notices 311
Íslenska Hér með lýsir Lexmark International, Inc. yfir því að þessi vara er í samræmi við grunnkröfur og aðrar
kröfur, sem gerðar eru í tilskipun 1999/5/EC.
Italiano Con la presente Lexmark International, Inc. dichiara che questo questo prodotto è conforme ai requisiti
essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE.
Latviski Ar šo Lexmark International, Inc. deklarē, ka šis izstrādājums atbilst Direktīvas 1999/5/EK būtiskajām
prasībām un citiem ar to saistītajiem noteikumiem.
LietuviųŠiuo Lexmark International, Inc. deklaruoja, kad šis produktas atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas
1999/5/EB direktyvos nuostatas.
Malti Bil-preżenti, Lexmark International, Inc., jiddikjara li dan il-prodott huwa konformi mal-ħtiġijiet
essenzjali u ma dispożizzjonijiet oħrajn relevanti li jinsabu fid-Direttiva 1999/5/KE.
Nederlands Hierbij verklaart Lexmark International, Inc. dat het toestel dit product in overeenstemming is met de essentiële
eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG.
Norsk Lexmark International, Inc. erklærer herved at dette produktet er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og
øvrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
Polski Niniejszym Lexmark International, Inc. oświadcza, że niniejszy produkt jest zgodny z zasadniczymi
wymogami oraz pozostałymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC.
Português A Lexmark International Inc. declara que este este produto está conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras
disposições da Diretiva 1999/5/CE.
Slovensky Lexmark International, Inc. týmto vyhlasuje, že tento produkt spĺňa základné požiadavky a všetky
príslušné ustanovenia smernice 1999/5/ES.
Slovensko Lexmark International, Inc. izjavlja, da je ta izdelek v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi
relevantnimi določili direktive 1999/5/ES.
Svenska Härmed intygar Lexmark International, Inc. att denna produkt står i överensstämmelse med de väsentliga
egenskapskrav och övriga relevanta bestämmelser som framgår av direktiv 1999/5/EG.
Notices 312
Index
Numerics
2100‑sheet tray
loading 65, 113
550‑sheet tray
installing 31
Symbols
[x]‑page jam, clear manual feeder
[250] 235
[x]‑page jam, lift front cover to
remove cartridge. [200–201] 226
[x]‑page jam, open tray [x].
[24x] 234
[x]‑page jam, open upper and lower
rear door. [231–234] 230
[x]‑page jam, open upper rear door.
[202] 229
[x]‑page jam, remove paper, open
expander rear door. Leave paper in
bin. [41y.xx] 240
[x]‑page jam, remove paper, open
finisher rear door. Leave paper in
bin. [451] 239
[x]‑page jam, remove paper, open
mailbox rear door. Leave paper in
bin. [43y.xx] 241
[x]‑page jam, remove paper, open
stapler door. Leave paper in bin.
[455–457] 236
[x]‑page jam, remove standard bin
jam. [203] 232
[x]‑page jam, remove tray 1 to clear
duplex. [235–239] 232
A
accessing the Embedded Web
Server 55, 103
Active NIC menu 166
adjusting brightness
Embedded Web Server 89, 137
printer control panel 89
printer display 137
adjusting display brightness 89, 137
adjusting Sleep mode 88, 136
adjusting toner darkness 78, 126
administrator settings
Embedded Web Server 83, 131
AppleTalk menu 171
attaching cables 35
available internal options 13
avoiding jams 147
avoiding paper jams 222
B
Background and Idle Screen
using 56, 104
Bin Setup menu 164
buttons, printer control panel 50
buttons, touch screen
using 52, 99
C
cables
Ethernet 35
USB 35
canceling
print job, from computer 82, 131
canceling a print job
from a computer 82, 131
from the printer control
panel 82, 131
cannot open Embedded Web
Server 293
card stock
loading 71, 119
tips 143
Cartridge low [88.xy] 243
Cartridge nearly low [88.xy] 243
Cartridge very low, [x] estimated
pages remain [88.xy] 243
Cartridge, imaging unit mismatch
[41.xy] 243
Change [paper source] to [custom
string] load [orientation] 243
Change [paper source] to [custom
type name] load [orientation] 244
Change [paper source] to [paper
size] load [orientation] 244
Change [paper source] to [paper
type] [paper size] load
[orientation] 244
Check tray [x] connection 244
checking an unresponsive
printer 259
checking status of parts and
supplies 86, 134
checking the status of parts and
supplies 86, 134
checking the virtual display
using the Embedded Web
Server 83, 131
checking virtual display
using the Embedded Web
Server 131
cleaning
exterior of the printer 218
cleaning the printer 218
Close door or insert cartridge 245
Close front door 245
Complex page, some data may not
have printed [39] 245
compressed images appear on
prints 275
confidential jobs
modifying print settings 84, 133
confidential print jobs 80, 129
printing from a Macintosh
computer 81, 129
printing from Windows 81, 129
Confidential Print menu 181
Configuration change, some held
jobs were not restored [57] 245
configuration information
wireless network 41
configurations
printer 48, 95
Configure MP menu 157
configuring
multiple printers 85, 133
supply notifications, imaging
unit 83, 132
supply notifications, maintenance
kit 83, 132
supply notifications, toner
cartridge 83, 132
configuring port settings 44
configuring supply
notifications 83, 132
connecting to a wireless network
using PBC, Push Button
Configuration method 42
Index 313
using PIN (Personal Identification
Number) method 42
using the Embedded Web
Server 43
using wireless setup wizard 42
conservation settings
brightness, adjusting 89, 137
conserving supplies 207
Eco‑Mode 86, 134
Hibernate Mode 89
Hibernate mode 137
Quiet mode 87, 135
Sleep mode 88, 136
conserving supplies 207
contacting customer support 294
control panel, printer
indicator light 50, 97
Sleep button light 50, 97
controller board
accessing 14
creating custom name
paper type 76
Custom Bin Names menu 163
Custom Names menu 163
custom paper type
assigning 125
custom paper type name
assigning 77
creating 124
Custom Type [x]
changing name 124
creating custom name 76
Custom Types menu 162
customer support
contacting 294
D
Default Source menu 154
Defective flash detected [51] 245
device and network settings
information
erasing 92, 139
directory list
printing 82, 130
Disk full 62 245
Disk must be formatted for use in
this device 245
disk wiping 92, 140
Disk Wiping menu 181
display troubleshooting
printer display is blank 261
display, printer control panel 50
adjusting brightness 89, 137
disposing of printer hard
disk 91, 138
documents, printing
from Macintosh 78, 126
from Windows 78, 126
E
Eco‑Mode setting 86, 134
Eco‑Settings
about 57
understanding 105
Edit Security Setups menu 179
embedded solutions information
erasing 92, 139
Embedded Web Server
accessing 55, 103
administrator settings 83, 131
checking the status of
parts 86, 134
checking the status of
supplies 86, 134
copying settings to other
printers 85, 133
modifying confidential print
settings 84, 133
networking settings 83, 131
problem accessing 293
Embedded Web Server
Administrator's Guide
where to find 83, 94, 131, 141
emission
notices 297, 303, 304, 305, 306,
308, 309, 310
Empty the hole punch box 246
emptying the hole punch box 219
encrypting the printer hard
disk 93, 140
envelopes
loading 71, 119
tips on using 143
environmental settings
conserving supplies 207
display brightness,
adjusting 89, 137
Eco‑Mode 86, 134
Hibernate Mode 89
Hibernate mode 137
Quiet mode 87, 135
Sleep mode 88, 136
erasing hard disk memory 92
erasing non‑volatile
memory 92, 139
erasing printer hard disk
memory 140
erasing volatile memory 91, 139
Error reading USB drive. Remove
USB. 246
Error reading USB hub. Remove
hub. 246
Ethernet network
preparing to set up for Ethernet
printing 39
Ethernet network setup
using Macintosh 39
using Windows 39
Ethernet networking
Macintosh 39
Windows 39
Ethernet port 35
Ethernet setup
preparing for an 39
exporting a configuration
using the Embedded Web
Server 58, 106
exterior of the printer
cleaning 218
F
factory defaults
restoring 90, 138
FCC notices 303, 305, 308, 309
finding more information about the
printer 9
finding printer IP address 55, 102
finisher
finishing features 150
supported paper sizes 150
finisher features 150
Finishing menu 195
firmware card 13
flash drive
printing from 79, 128
flash drives
supported file types 79, 127
font sample list
printing 82, 130
Forms and Favorites
setting up 56, 104
G
General Settings menu 183
Index 314
green settings
Eco‑Mode 86, 134
Hibernate Mode 89
Hibernate mode 137
Quiet mode 87, 135
H
held jobs 80, 129
printing from a Macintosh
computer 81, 129
printing from Windows 81, 129
Help menu 206
Hibernate Mode
using 89
Hibernate mode
using 137
hiding icons on the home
screen 55, 103
hole punch box
emptying 219
Home button
printer control panel 50, 97
home screen
buttons, understanding 51, 98
customizing 55, 103
hiding icons 55, 103
showing icons 55, 103
home screen applications
configuring 56, 103
finding information 56, 103
home screen buttons
understanding 51, 98
HTML menu 204
I
icons on the home screen
hiding 55, 103
showing 55, 103
Image menu 205
imaging unit
ordering 210
Imaging unit low [84.xy] 246
Imaging unit nearly low [84.xy] 246
Imaging unit very low, [x] estimated
pages remain [84.xy] 246
importing a configuration
using the Embedded Web
Server 58, 106
Incompatible output bin [x]
[59] 246
Incompatible tray [x] [59] 247
Incorrect paper size, open [paper
source] [34] 247
indicator light 97
printer control panel 50
individual settings information
erasing 92, 139
Insert hole punch box 247
Insert staple cartridge 247
Insert Tray [x] 247
Install bin [x] 247
Install Tray [x] 248
installing an Internal Solutions
Port 18
installing an optional card 23
installing options
order of installation 31
installing printer hard disk 24
installing printer on a network
Ethernet networking 39
installing printer software
adding options 38
installing printer software
(Windows) 37
Insufficient memory for Flash
Memory Defragment operation
[37] 248
Insufficient memory to collate job
[37] 248
Insufficient memory to support
Resource Save feature [35] 249
Insufficient memory, some Held
Jobs were deleted [37] 248
Insufficient memory, some held
jobs will not be restored [37] 248
internal options 13
internal print server
troubleshooting 270
Internal Solutions Port
changing port settings 44
installing 18
troubleshooting 271
IP address of computer
finding 54, 102
IP address, printer
finding 55, 102
IPv6 menu 170
J
jams
accessing 224
avoiding 222
understanding messages 224
jams, clearing
behind rear door 229, 230
in duplex area 232
in finisher rear door 239
in mailbox rear door 241
in multipurpose feeder 235
in rear expander door 240
in standard bin 232
in staple finisher 236
in the tray 234
inside the printer 226
Job Accounting menu 198
K
keypad
printer control panel 50, 97
L
labels, paper
tips 144
letterhead
loading, 2100‑sheet tray 65, 113
loading, multipurpose
feeder 71, 119
loading, trays 59, 107
linking trays 76, 77, 124, 125
Load [paper source] with [custom
string] [paper orientation] 249
Load [paper source] with [custom
type name] [paper orientation] 249
Load [paper source] with [paper
size] [paper orientation] 249
Load [paper source] with [paper
type] [paper size] [paper
orientation] 249
Load Manual Feeder with [custom
string] [paper orientation] 250
Load Manual Feeder with [custom
type name] [paper orientation] 250
Load Manual Feeder with [paper
size] [paper orientation] 250
Load manual feeder with [paper
type] [paper size] [paper
orientation] 250
Load staples 250
loading
2100‑sheet tray 65, 113
card stock 71, 119
envelopes 71, 119
letterhead in 2100‑sheet
tray 65, 113
Index 315
letterhead in multipurpose
feeder 71, 119
letterhead in trays 59, 107
multipurpose feeder 71, 119
optional 250‑sheet tray 59, 107
optional 550‑sheet tray 59, 107
standard 550‑sheet tray 59
standard tray 107
transparencies 71, 119
lock, security 90, 138
M
maintenance kit
ordering 211
Maintenance kit low [80.xy] 251
Maintenance kit nearly low
[80.xy] 251
Maintenance kit very low, [x]
estimated pages remain
[80.xy] 251
memory
types installed on printer 91, 138
memory card 13
installing 17
Memory full [38] 251
menu settings
loading on multiple
printers 85, 133
menu settings page
printing 85, 133
menus
Active NIC 166
AppleTalk 171
Bin Setup 164
Confidential Print 181
Configure MP 157
Custom Bin Names 163
Custom Names 163
Custom Types 162
Default Source 154
Disk Wiping 181
Edit Security Setups 179
Finishing 195
General Settings 183
Help 206
HTML 204
Image 205
IPv6 170
Job Accounting 198
list of 153
Miscellaneous Security
Settings 180
Network [x] 166
Network Card 168
Network Reports 168
Paper Loading 161
Paper Size/Type 154
Paper Texture 158
Paper Weight 159
Parallel [x] 173
PCL Emul 202
PDF 201
PostScript 201
Print Settings 192
Quality 198
Reports 165
Security Audit Log 182
Serial [x] 175
Set Date/Time 182
Setup 194
SMTP Setup 178
Standard Network 166
Standard USB 172
Substitute Size 158
TCP/IP 169
Universal Setup 163
Utilities 200
Wireless 171
XPS 201
Miscellaneous Security Settings
menu 180
mobile device
printing from 78, 126
moving the printer 11, 12, 219, 221
multipurpose feeder
loading 71, 119
N
Network [x] menu 166
Network [x] software error
[54] 251
Network Card menu 168
Network Reports menu 168
network settings
Embedded Web Server 83, 131
network setup page
printing 85, 134
Networking Guide
where to find 83, 131
noise emission levels 297
noise, printer
reducing 87
Non‑Lexmark [supply type], see
User’s Guide [33.xy] 251
non‑volatile memory 91, 138
erasing 92, 139
Not enough free space in flash
memory for resources [52] 252
notices 296, 297, 298, 299, 300,
303, 304, 305, 306, 308, 309, 310,
311
number of remaining pages
estimate 210
O
optional 250‑sheet tray
loading 59, 107
optional 550‑sheet tray
loading 59, 107
optional card
installing 23
options
550‑sheet tray, installing 31
firmware cards 13
Internal Solutions Port,
installing 18
memory card 13, 17
printer hard disk, installing 24
printer hard disk, removing 29
updating in printer driver 38
ordering
imaging unit 210
maintenance kit 211
staple cartridges 211
ordering supplies
toner cartridge 210
P
paper
characteristics 144
letterhead 146
preprinted forms 146
recycled 146
selecting 145
storing 144, 147
unacceptable 146
Universal size setting 59, 107
using recycled 207
Paper changes needed 252
paper characteristics 144
paper feed troubleshooting
message remains after jam is
cleared 273
paper jams
avoiding 222
Index 316
paper jams, clearing
behind rear door 229, 230
in duplex area 232
in finisher rear door 239
in mailbox rear door 241
in multipurpose feeder 235
in rear expander door 240
in standard bin 232
in staple finisher 236
in the tray 234
inside the printer 226
Paper Loading menu 161
paper size
setting 58, 106
Paper Size/Type menu 154
paper sizes
supported 148
Paper Texture menu 158
paper type
setting 58, 106
paper types
supported 148
Paper Weight menu 159
paper weights
supported 148
Parallel [x] menu 173
Parallel port [x] disabled [56] 252
parts
checking status 86, 134
checking, from printer control
panel 86
checking, on the printer control
panel 134
checking, using the Embedded
Web Server 86, 134
using genuine Lexmark 210
PCL Emul menu 202
PDF menu 201
Personal Identification Number
method
using 42
port settings
configuring 44
PostScript menu 201
preparing to set up the printer on
an Ethernet network 39
print irregularities 279
print job
canceling, from computer 82, 131
print quality troubleshooting
blank pages 283
characters have jagged edges 274
clipped pages or images 274
compressed images appear on
prints 275
gray background on prints 276
horizontal voids appear on
prints 277
print irregularities 279
print is too dark 281
print is too light 282
printer is printing solid black
pages 284
repeating defects appear on
prints 285
shadow images appear on
prints 286
skewed print 286
streaked horizontal lines appear
on prints 287
streaked vertical lines 288
toner fog or background shading
appears on prints 289
toner rubs off 290
toner specks appear on prints 291
transparency print quality is
poor 291
uneven print density 291
white streaks 291
Print Settings menu 192
print troubleshooting
envelope seals when printing 262
error reading flash drive 262
held jobs do not print 261
incorrect characters print 263
incorrect margins on prints 278
jammed pages are not
reprinted 272
job prints from wrong tray 263
job prints on wrong paper 263
jobs do not print 265
Large jobs do not collate 264
multiple‑language PDF files do not
print 264
paper curl 279
paper frequently jams 273
print job takes longer than
expected 265
tray linking does not work 267
unexpected page breaks
occur 268
printer
configurations 48, 95
finishing features 150
minimum clearances 11, 12
models 48, 95
moving 11, 12, 219, 221
selecting a location 11, 12
shipping 221
printer control panel
factory defaults, restoring 90, 138
indicator light 50, 97
parts 50, 97
Sleep button light 50, 97
using 50, 97
printer control panel, virtual
display
using the Embedded Web
Server 83
Printer had to restart. Last job may
be incomplete. 252
printer hard disk
disposing of 91, 138
encrypting 93, 140
installing 24
removing 29
wiping 92, 140
printer hard disk
encryption 93, 140
printer hard disk memory
erasing 92, 140
printer information
where to find 9
printer IP address
finding 55, 102
printer is printing blank pages 283
printer messages
[x]‑page jam, clear manual feeder
[250] 235
[x]‑page jam, lift front cover to
remove cartridge. [200–
201] 226
[x]‑page jam, open tray [x].
[24x] 234
[x]‑page jam, open upper and
lower rear door. [231–234] 230
[x]‑page jam, open upper rear
door. [202] 229
[x]‑page jam, remove paper, open
expander rear door. Leave paper
in bin. [41y.xx] 240
[x]‑page jam, remove paper, open
finisher rear door. Leave paper in
bin. [451] 239
Index 317
[x]‑page jam, remove paper, open
mailbox rear door. Leave paper
in bin. [43y.xx] 241
[x]‑page jam, remove paper, open
stapler door. Leave paper in bin.
[455–457] 236
[x]‑page jam, remove standard bin
jam. [203] 232
[x]‑page jam, remove tray 1 to
clear duplex. [235–239] 232
Cartridge low [88.xy] 243
Cartridge nearly low [88.xy] 243
Cartridge very low, [x] estimated
pages remain [88.xy] 243
Cartridge, imaging unit mismatch
[41.xy] 243
Change [paper source] to [custom
string] load [orientation] 243
Change [paper source] to [custom
type name] load
[orientation] 244
Change [paper source] to [paper
size] load [orientation] 244
Change [paper source] to [paper
type] [paper size] load
[orientation] 244
Check tray [x] connection 244
Close door or insert cartridge 245
Close front door 245
Complex page, some data may not
have printed [39] 245
Configuration change, some held
jobs were not restored [57] 245
Defective flash detected [51] 245
Disk full 62 245
Disk must be formatted for use in
this device 245
Disk near full. Securely clearing
disk space. 246
Empty the hole punch box 246
Error reading USB drive. Remove
USB. 246
Error reading USB hub. Remove
hub. 246
Imaging unit low [84.xy] 246
Imaging unit nearly low
[84.xy] 246
Imaging unit very low, [x]
estimated pages remain
[84.xy] 246
Incompatible output bin [x]
[59] 246
Incompatible tray [x] [59] 247
Incorrect paper size, open [paper
source] [34] 247
Insert hole punch box 247
Insert staple cartridge 247
Insert Tray [x] 247
Install bin [x] 247
Install Tray [x] 248
Insufficient memory for Flash
Memory Defragment operation
[37] 248
Insufficient memory to collate job
[37] 248
Insufficient memory to support
Resource Save feature [35] 249
Insufficient memory, some Held
Jobs were deleted [37] 248
Insufficient memory, some held
jobs will not be restored
[37] 248
Load [paper source] with [custom
string] [paper orientation] 249
Load [paper source] with [custom
type name [paper
orientation] 249
Load [paper source] with [paper
size] [paper orientation] 249
Load [paper source] with [paper
type] [paper size] [paper
orientation] 249
Load Manual Feeder with [custom
string] [paper orientation] 250
Load Manual Feeder with [custom
type name] [paper
orientation] 250
Load Manual Feeder with [paper
size] [paper orientation] 250
Load manual feeder with [paper
type] [paper size] [paper
orientation] 250
Load staples 250
Maintenance kit low [80.xy] 251
Maintenance kit nearly low
[80.xy] 251
Maintenance kit very low, [x]
estimated pages remain
[80.xy] 251
Memory full [38] 251
Network [x] software error
[54] 251
Non‑Lexmark [supply type], see
User’s Guide [33.xy] 251
Not enough free space in flash
memory for resources [52] 252
Paper changes needed 252
Parallel port [x] disabled [56] 252
Printer had to restart. Last job
may be incomplete. 252
Reattach bin [x] 252
Reattach bins [x] – [y] 253
Reinstall missing or unresponsive
cartridge [31.xy] 253
Reinstall missing or unresponsive
imaging unit [31.xy] 254
Remove defective disk [61] 254
Remove packaging material, [area
name] 254
Remove paper from [linked set bin
name] 254
Remove paper from all bins 254
Remove paper from bin [x] 254
Remove paper from standard
output bin 254
Replace cartridge, 0 estimated
pages remain [88.xy] 255
Replace cartridge, printer region
mismatch [42.xy] 255
Replace imaging unit, 0 estimated
pages remain [84.xy] 255
Replace maintenance kit, 0
estimated pages remain
[80.xy] 255
Replace missing or unresponsive
fuser [31.xy] 254
Replace unsupported cartridge
[32.xy] 256
Replace unsupported fuser
[32.xy] 256
Replace unsupported imaging unit
[32.xy] 256
Restore held jobs? 256
Serial option [x] error [54] 256
Serial port [x] disabled [56] 256
Some held jobs were not
restored 257
Standard network software error
[54] 257
Standard USB port disabled
[56] 257
Supply needed to complete
job 257
Too many bins attached [58] 257
Too many disks installed [58] 257
Index 318
Too many flash options installed
[58] 258
Too many trays attached [58] 258
Tray [x] paper size
unsupported 258
Unformatted flash detected
[53] 258
Unsupported disk 258
Unsupported option in slot [x]
[55] 258
Unsupported USB hub, please
remove 246
USB port [x] disabled [56] 259
printer options troubleshooting
internal option is not
detected 269
internal print server 270
Internal Solutions Port 271
tray problems 270
USB/parallel interface card 272
printer options, troubleshooting
2100‑sheet tray problems 268
printer problems, solving basic 259
printer setup
verifying 47
printer software, installing
(Windows) 37
printing
canceling, from printer control
panel 82, 131
directory list 82, 130
font sample list 82, 130
forms 77, 125
from a mobile device 78, 126
from flash drive 79, 128
from Macintosh 78, 126
from Windows 78, 126
menu settings page 85, 133
network setup page 85, 134
printing a directory list 82, 130
printing a document 78, 126
printing a font sample list 82, 130
printing a menu settings
page 85, 133
printing a network setup
page 85, 134
printing confidential and other held
jobs
from a Macintosh
computer 81, 129
from Windows 81, 129
printing forms 77, 125
printing from a flash drive 79, 128
printing from a mobile
device 78, 126
printing slows down 266
publications
where to find 9
Push Button Configuration method
using 42
Q
Quality menu 198
Quiet mode 87
using 135
R
Reattach bin [x] 252
Reattach bins [x] – [y] 253
recycled paper
using 146, 207
recycling
Lexmark packaging 208
Lexmark products 208
toner cartridges 208
reducing noise 87
reducing printer noise 135
Reinstall missing or unresponsive
cartridge [31.xy] 253
Reinstall missing or unresponsive
imaging unit [31.xy] 254
Remote Operator Panel
setting up 57, 105
Remove defective disk [61] 254
Remove packaging material, [area
name] 254
Remove paper from [linked set bin
name] 254
Remove paper from all bins 254
Remove paper from bin [x] 254
Remove paper from standard
output bin 254
removing printer hard disk 29
repeat print jobs 80, 129
printing from a Macintosh
computer 81, 129
printing from Windows 81, 129
repeating defects appear on
prints 285
Replace cartridge, 0 estimated
pages remain [88.xy] 255
Replace cartridge, printer region
mismatch [42.xy] 255
Replace imaging unit, 0 estimated
pages remain [84.xy] 255
Replace maintenance kit, 0
estimated pages remain
[80.xy] 255
Replace missing or unresponsive
fuser [31.xy] 254
Replace unsupported cartridge
[32.xy] 256
Replace unsupported fuser
[32.xy] 256
Replace unsupported imaging unit
[32.xy] 256
replacing a staple cartridge 217
replacing supplies
staple cartridge 217
replacing the toner
cartridge 212, 214
Reports menu 165
reserve print jobs 129
printing from a Macintosh
computer 81, 129
printing from Windows 81, 129
Restore held jobs? 256
restoring factory default
settings 90, 138
S
safety information 7, 8
security
modifying confidential print
settings 84, 133
Security Audit Log menu 182
security lock 90, 138
security settings information
erasing 92, 139
security Web page
where to find 94, 141
selecting a location for the
printer 11, 12
selecting paper 145
Serial [x] menu 175
Serial option [x] error [54] 256
Serial port [x] disabled [56] 256
serial printing
setting up 45
Set Date/Time menu 182
setting
paper size 58, 106
paper type 58, 106
TCP/IP address 169
Index 319
setting the Universal paper
size 59, 107
setting up serial printing 45
setting up the printer
on an Ethernet network
(Macintosh only) 39
on an Ethernet network (Windows
only) 39
Setup menu 194
shipping the printer 221
showing icons on the home
screen 55, 103
Sleep button
printer control panel 50, 97
Sleep mode
adjusting 88, 136
SMTP Setup menu 178
Some held jobs were not
restored 257
standard 250‑sheet tray
loading 107
standard 550‑sheet tray
loading 59, 107
Standard Network menu 166
Standard network software error
54] 257
standard tray
loading 59, 107
Standard USB menu 172
Standard USB port disabled
[56] 257
staple cartridge
replacing 217
staple cartridges
ordering 211
statement of volatility 91, 138
status of parts
checking 86, 134
status of supplies
checking 86, 134
Stop or Cancel button
printer control panel 50, 97
storing
paper 147
supplies 212
storing print jobs 80, 129
streaked horizontal lines appear on
prints 287
streaked vertical lines appear on
prints 288
streaks appear 291
Substitute Size menu 158
supplies
checking status 86, 134
checking, from printer control
panel 86
checking, on the printer control
panel 134
checking, using the Embedded
Web Server 86, 134
conserving 207
storing 212
using genuine Lexmark 210
using recycled paper 207
supplies, ordering
imaging unit 210
maintenance kit 211
staple cartridges 211
toner cartridge 210
Supply needed to complete job 257
supply notifications
configuring 83, 132
supported flash drives 79, 127
supported paper sizes 148
supported paper types 148
supported paper weights 148
T
TCP/IP menu 169
tips
card stock 143
labels, paper 144
on using envelopes 143
transparencies 144
tips on using envelopes 143
toner cartridge
ordering 210
replacing 212, 214
toner cartridges
recycling 208
toner darkness
adjusting 78, 126
Too many bins attached [58] 257
Too many disks installed [58] 257
Too many flash options installed
[58] 258
Too many trays attached [58] 258
touch screen
buttons, using 52, 99
transparencies
loading 71, 119
tips 144
Tray [x] paper size
unsupported 258
trays
linking 76, 77, 124, 125
unlinking 76, 77, 124, 125
troubleshooting
an application error has
occurred 293
cannot open Embedded Web
Server 293
checking an unresponsive
printer 259
contacting customer support 294
solving basic printer
problems 259
troubleshooting, display
printer display is blank 261
troubleshooting, paper feed
message remains after jam is
cleared 273
troubleshooting, print
envelope seals when printing 262
error reading flash drive 262
held jobs do not print 261
incorrect characters print 263
incorrect margins on prints 278
jammed pages are not
reprinted 272
job prints from wrong tray 263
job prints on wrong paper 263
jobs do not print 265
Large jobs do not collate 264
multiple‑language PDF files do not
print 264
paper curl 279
paper frequently jams 273
print job takes longer than
expected 265
tray linking does not work 267
unexpected page breaks
occur 268
troubleshooting, print quality
blank pages 283
characters have jagged edges 274
clipped pages or images 274
compressed images appear on
prints 275
gray background on prints 276
horizontal voids appear on
prints 277
print irregularities 279
print is too dark 281
print is too light 282
Index 320
printer is printing solid black
pages 284
repeating defects appear on
prints 285
shadow images appear on
prints 286
skewed print 286
streaked horizontal lines appear
on prints 287
streaked vertical lines 288
toner fog or background shading
appears on prints 289
toner rubs off 290
toner specks appear on prints 291
transparency print quality is
poor 291
uneven print density 291
white streaks on a page 291
troubleshooting, printer options
2100‑sheet tray problems 268
internal option is not
detected 269
internal print server 270
Internal Solutions Port 271
tray problems 270
USB/parallel interface card 272
troubleshooting, printing
printing slows down 266
U
understanding the home
screen 51, 98
uneven print density 291
Unformatted flash detected
[53] 258
Universal Paper Size
setting 59
Universal paper size
setting 107
Universal Setup menu 163
unlinking trays 76, 77, 124, 125
Unsupported option in slot [x]
[55] 258
Unsupported USB hub, please
remove 246
updating options in printer
driver 38
USB port 35
printer control panel 50, 97
USB port [x] disabled [56] 259
USB/parallel interface card
troubleshooting 272
User’s Guide
using 9
using Forms and Favorites 77, 125
using Hibernate Mode 89
using Hibernate mode 137
using Quiet mode 135
using recycled paper 207
using the printer control
panel 50, 97
using the touch‑screen
buttons 52, 99
Utilities menu 200
V
verify print jobs 80, 129
printing from a Macintosh
computer 81, 129
printing from Windows 81, 129
verifying printer setup 47
vertical voids appear 291
virtual display
checking, using Embedded Web
Server 83, 131
voids appear 291
volatile memory 91, 138
erasing 91, 139
volatility
statement of 91, 138
W
wiping the printer hard disk 92, 140
Wireless menu 171
wireless network
configuration information 41
wireless network setup
using the Embedded Web
Server 43
wireless setup wizard
using 42
X
XPS menu 201
Index 321

Navigation menu